Datalogic Scanning 9500 Users Manual
9504 to the manual 7be377b7-6c82-4fb9-a1c7-8bbccdc3612a
2015-02-02
: Datalogic-Scanning Datalogic-Scanning-9500-Users-Manual-425506 datalogic-scanning-9500-users-manual-425506 datalogic-scanning pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 460
Download | ![]() |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Magellan® 9500/9500Ω 9504/9504Ω with SmartSentry® Product Reference Guide Datalogic Scanning, Inc. 959 Terry Street Eugene, Oregon 97402 Telephone: (541) 683-5700 Fax: (541) 345-7140 An Unpublished Work - All rights reserved. No part of the contents of this documentation or the procedures described therein may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written permission of Datalogic Scanning, Inc. or its subsidiaries or affiliates ("Datalogic" or “Datalogic Scanning”). Owners of Datalogic products are hereby granted a non-exclusive, revocable license to reproduce and transmit this documentation for the purchaser's own internal business purposes. Purchaser shall not remove or alter any proprietary notices, including copyright notices, contained in this documentation and shall ensure that all notices appear on any reproductions of the documentation. Should future revisions of this manual be published, you can acquire printed versions by contacting your Datalogic representative. Electronic versions may either be downloadable from the Datalogic website (www.scanning.datalogic.com) or provided on appropriate media. If you visit our website and would like to make comments or suggestions about this or other Datalogic publications, please let us know via the "Contact Datalogic" page. Disclaimer Datalogic has taken reasonable measures to provide information in this manual that is complete and accurate, however, Datalogic reserves the right to change any specification at any time without prior notice. Datalogic is a registered trademark of Datalogic S.p.A. in many countries and the Datalogic logo is a trademark of Datalogic S.p.A. All other brand and product names referred to herein may be trademarks of their respective owners. This product may be covered by one or more of the following patents: 4603262 • 4639606 • 4652750 • 4672215 • 4699447 • 4709369 • 4749879 • 4786798 • 4792666 • 4794240 • 4798943 • 4799164 • 4820911 • 4845349 • 4861972 • 4861973 • 4866257 • 4868836 • 4879456 • 4939355 • 4939356 • 4943127 • 4963719 • 4971176 • 4971177 • 4991692 • 5001406 • 5015831 • 5019697 • 5019698 • 5086879 • 5115120 • 5144118 • 5146463 • 5179270 • 5198649 • 5200597 • 5202784 • 5208449 • 5210397 • 5212371 • 5212372 • 5214270 • 5229590 • 5231293 • 5232185 • 5233169 • 5235168 • 5237161 • 5237162 • 5239165 • 5247161 • 5256864 • 5258604 • 5258699 • 5260554 • 5274219 • 5296689 • 5298728 • 5311000 • 5327451 • 5329103 • 5330370 • 5347113 • 5347121 • 5371361 • 5382783 • 5386105 • 5389917 • 5410108 • 5420410 • 5422472 • 5426507 • 5438187 • 5440110 • 5440111 • 5446271 • 5446749 • 5448050 • 5463211 • 5475206 • 5475207 • 5479011 • 5481098 • 5491328 • 5493108 • 5504350 • 5508505 • 5512740 • 5541397 • 5552593 • 5557095 • 5563402 • 5565668 • 5576531 • 5581707 • 5594231 • 5594441 • 5598070 • 5602376 • 5608201 • 5608399 • 5612529 • 5629510 • 5635699 • 5641958 • 5646391 • 5661435 • 5664231 • 5666045 • 5671374 • 5675138 • 5682028 • 5686716 • 5696370 • 5703347 • 5705802 • 5714750 • 5717194 • 5723852 • 5750976 • 5767502 • 5770847 • 5786581 • 5786585 • 5787103 • 5789732 • 5796222 • 5804809 • 5814803 • 5814804 • 5821721 • 5822343 • 5825009 • 5834708 • 5834750 • 5837983 • 5837988 • 5852286 • 5864129 • 5869827 • 5874722 • 5883370 • 5905249 • 5907147 • 5923023 • 5925868 • 5929421 • 5945670 • 5959284 • 5962838 • 5979769 • 6000619 • 6006991 • 6012639 • 6016135 • 6024284 • 6041374 • 6042012 • 6045044 • 6047889 • 6047894 • 6056198 • 6065676 • 6069696 • 6073849 • 6073851 • 6094288 • 6112993 • 6129279 • 6129282 • 6134039 • 6142376 • 6152368 • 6152372 • 6155488 • 6166375 • 6169614 • 6173894 • 6176429 • 6188500 • 6189784 • 6213397 • 6223986 • 6230975 • 6230976 • 6244510 • 6259545 • 6260763 • 6266175 • 6273336 • 6276605 • 6279829 • 6290134 • 6290135 • 6293467 • 6303927 • 6311895 • 6318634 • 6328216 • 6332576 • 6332577 • 6343741 • 6454168 • 6478224 • 6568598 • 6578765 • 6705527 • 6974084 • 6991169 • 7051940 • 7170414 • 7172123 • 7201322 • 7204422 • 7215493 • 7224540 • 7234641 • 7243850• 601 26 118.6 • AU703547 • D312631 • D313590 • D320011 • D320012 • D323492 • D330707 • D330708 • D349109 • D350127 • D350735 • D351149 • D351150 • D352936 • D352937 • D352938 • D352939 • D358588 • D361565 • D372234 • D374630 • D374869 • D375493 • D376357 • D377345 • D377346 • D377347 • D377348 • D388075 • D446524 • EP0256296 • EP0260155 • EP0260156 • EP0295936 • EP0325469 • EP0349770 • EP0368254 • EP0442215 • EP0498366 • EP0531645 • EP0663643 • EP0698251 • EP01330772 • GB2252333 • GB2284086 • GB2301691 • GB2304954 • GB2307093 • GB2308267 • GB2308678 • GB2319103 • GB2333163 • GB2343079 • GB2344486 • GB2345568 • GB2354340 • ISR107546 • ISR118507 • ISR118508 • JP1962823 • JP1971216 • JP2513442 • JP2732459 • JP2829331 • JP2953593 • JP2964278 • MEX185552 • MEX187245 • RE37166 • RE40.071 • Other Patents Pending Table of Contents Chapter 1. Introduction .................................................................................... 1-1 Manual Overview ........................................................................................................1-1 How to Use This Manual .........................................................................................1-2 Scanner and Scanner/Scale Nomenclature ......................................................................1-4 Connectors ..........................................................................................................1-5 Physical Parameters ....................................................................................................1-6 Scanning .............................................................................................................1-6 Deactivating EAS Tags ...........................................................................................1-6 Weighing .............................................................................................................1-7 Warm-Up Time .....................................................................................................1-8 Electrical Specifications .............................................................................................. 1-10 Power Supply ..................................................................................................... 1-10 Laser and Product Safety ........................................................................................... 1-11 Labeling ................................................................................................................... 1-13 Agency Compliances .................................................................................................. 1-14 Bar Codes Supported ................................................................................................. 1-15 Chapter 2. Site Preparation and Installation..................................................... 2-1 Pre-Installation Considerations ......................................................................................2-2 Checkstand Design ......................................................................................................2-3 Scanner Installation ....................................................................................................2-4 Scanner Maintenance ..................................................................................................2-4 References .................................................................................................................2-4 Scanner Usage ...........................................................................................................2-4 Site Preparation Overview ............................................................................................2-5 Ventilation and Spacing ...............................................................................................2-7 Service Access ............................................................................................................2-9 Power Installation ..................................................................................................... 2-10 Grounding .......................................................................................................... 2-10 Checkstand Preparation ............................................................................................. 2-11 Liquid Spills and Moisture ..................................................................................... 2-12 Counter Cutout ......................................................................................................... 2-12 Checkstand Mounting .......................................................................................... 2-18 Checkstand Vibration ........................................................................................... 2-18 Installation Overview ................................................................................................. 2-18 Unpacking .......................................................................................................... 2-19 Operational Verification ........................................................................................ 2-20 Diagnostic Modes ................................................................................................ 2-24 Cables & Connections .......................................................................................... 2-25 Remote Scale Display Placement/Installation ................................................................ 2-27 Lighting Considerations ........................................................................................ 2-27 Product Reference Guide 1 Viewing Angle ..................................................................................................... 2-28 Placing and Installing the Remote Scale Display ...................................................... 2-29 Changing Weighing Modes .................................................................................... 2-32 Set-Up & Installation ................................................................................................. 2-33 EAS Considerations ............................................................................................. 2-33 Set-up ............................................................................................................... 2-36 Installation ......................................................................................................... 2-38 System Power-Up Recap ............................................................................................ 2-41 Chapter 3. Operation and Maintenance ............................................................ 3-1 Scanning Items ....................................................................................................3-1 Deactivating Security Labels ...................................................................................3-3 Proper Weighing Technique ....................................................................................3-5 Operational Controls ....................................................................................................3-6 Operational Modes ......................................................................................................3-6 Power-Up/Selftest & Pre-Operation ..........................................................................3-6 Operating Mode ....................................................................................................3-8 Additional Functions ....................................................................................................3-9 Programming .......................................................................................................3-9 Diagnostic Mode ...................................................................................................3-9 Scanner and Scale Reset ........................................................................................3-9 Scale Adjustments .............................................................................................. 3-10 Operational Maintenance ............................................................................................ 3-12 Vertical Scan Window Replacement ....................................................................... 3-13 Horizontal Scan Window Replacement (WRG) .......................................................... 3-15 Chapter 4. Problem Isolation ........................................................................... 4-1 Diagnostic Procedures ..................................................................................................4-2 Error Codes ................................................................................................................4-3 Scale Error Reporting ...................................................................................................4-5 Flowcharts .................................................................................................................4-6 Chapter 5. Calibration ...................................................................................... 5-1 Description of Calibration Sequence ...............................................................................5-2 Motion Test ................................................................................................................5-3 Automatic Zero Setting Test .........................................................................................5-3 Preparing the Scanner/Scale for Calibration ....................................................................5-4 Calibrating the Scale (Pounds & Kilograms) ....................................................................5-4 Calibration Verification (U.S. Pounds) .............................................................................5-7 Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1) ...............................................................................5-7 Shift Test .............................................................................................................5-8 Increasing- Load Test (Phase 2) ..............................................................................5-9 Blanking Test .......................................................................................................5-9 Decreasing-Load Test .......................................................................................... 5-10 Return to Zero Test ............................................................................................. 5-10 Calibration Verification (Kilograms) .............................................................................. 5-11 Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1) ............................................................................. 5-11 2 Magellan® 9500 Shift Test (Metric) ............................................................................................... 5-12 Increasing- Load Test (Phase 2) ............................................................................ 5-13 Blanking Test ..................................................................................................... 5-14 Decreasing-Load Test .......................................................................................... 5-15 Return to Zero Test ............................................................................................. 5-15 Chapter 6. Programming................................................................................... 6-1 Introduction to Label Programming ................................................................................6-1 Understanding the Basics .............................................................................................6-1 Integrating the Scanner With Your Host System ..............................................................6-2 Customizing Your Scanner’s Operation .....................................................................6-2 Programming Overview ................................................................................................6-4 Programming via Handheld Device ..........................................................................6-4 What Is Programming Mode? ..................................................................................6-5 Entering and Exiting Programming Mode. .................................................................6-5 Programming Session ............................................................................................6-6 LED and Beeper Indicators ......................................................................................... 6-10 If You Make a Mistake... ............................................................................................. 6-10 Return to Factory Settings .................................................................................... 6-10 Test Mode .......................................................................................................... 6-11 General Scanner and Scale Features ............................................................................ 6-12 Double Read Timeout .......................................................................................... 6-12 Laser Timeout .................................................................................................... 6-14 Motor Timeout .................................................................................................... 6-16 Green LED Idle State ........................................................................................... 6-19 Scanner Button Options ....................................................................................... 6-20 Power-up Beep Control ........................................................................................ 6-22 Good Read Beep Control ...................................................................................... 6-24 Good Read Beep Frequency .................................................................................. 6-25 Good Read Beep Length ....................................................................................... 6-27 Good Read Beep Volume ...................................................................................... 6-28 Good Read When to Indicate ................................................................................ 6-31 Scale Enable ...................................................................................................... 6-33 Scale Country Mode ............................................................................................ 6-34 Scale Enforced Zero Return .................................................................................. 6-36 Scale Interface Type ............................................................................................ 6-38 Scale Motion Level Filter ...................................................................................... 6-40 Scale LED Enable ................................................................................................ 6-42 Remote Display — Enable/Disable ......................................................................... 6-43 Aux Port Mode .................................................................................................... 6-44 Laser Failure Mode .............................................................................................. 6-46 Productivity Index Reporting (PIR)/Cashier Training (CT) ......................................... 6-47 EAS Features ............................................................................................................ 6-48 EAS Mode .......................................................................................................... 6-48 EAS Beep Duration .............................................................................................. 6-51 EAS Retry Count ................................................................................................. 6-52 Manual EAS Deactivation Push Button .................................................................... 6-53 EAS Deactivation Duration — Coupled .................................................................... 6-56 Product Reference Guide 3 EAS Deactivation Duration — Retry ....................................................................... 6-57 EAS Deactivation Duration — Manual ..................................................................... 6-58 Interface Related Features ......................................................................................... 6-59 Interface Type .................................................................................................... 6-59 Maximum Host-Transmitted Message Length .......................................................... 6-66 Number of Host Transmission Buffers .................................................................... 6-67 Global Prefix ....................................................................................................... 6-68 Global Suffix ....................................................................................................... 6-70 IBM Features ............................................................................................................ 6-72 IBM Interface Options .......................................................................................... 6-72 IBM Scale Address .............................................................................................. 6-73 IBM Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format ................................................................. 6-75 IBM USB Interface Options ................................................................................... 6-76 IBM USB Scanner Device Type .............................................................................. 6-78 RS-232 Features ....................................................................................................... 6-79 RS-232 Baud Rate ............................................................................................... 6-79 RS-232 Number of Data Bits ................................................................................. 6-83 RS-232 Number of Stop Bits ................................................................................. 6-84 RS-232 Parity ..................................................................................................... 6-85 RS-232 Hardware Control ..................................................................................... 6-87 RS-232 Intercharacter Delay ................................................................................ 6-89 RS-232 Software Flow Control .............................................................................. 6-90 RS-232 Host Echo ............................................................................................... 6-91 RS-232 Host Echo Quiet Interval ........................................................................... 6-92 RS-232 Ignore Host Commands ............................................................................ 6-93 RS-232 TTL ........................................................................................................ 6-94 RS-232 TTL Invert ............................................................................................... 6-95 RS-232 Beep on ASCII BEL ................................................................................... 6-96 RS-232 Beep After Weigh ..................................................................................... 6-97 RS-232 Beep on Not on File .................................................................................. 6-98 RS-232 ACK NAK Enable ...................................................................................... 6-99 RS-232 ACK Character ....................................................................................... 6-101 RS-232 NAK Character ....................................................................................... 6-102 RS-232 Retry on ACK NAK Timeout ..................................................................... 6-103 RS-232 ACK NAK Timeout Value ......................................................................... 6-104 RS-232 ACK NAK Retry Count ............................................................................. 6-105 RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling ......................................................................... 6-106 RS-232 Label ID Control .................................................................................... 6-108 Single Cable RS-232 Options .................................................................................... 6-110 Single Cable RS-232 Scanner Only Protocol .......................................................... 6-111 Single Cable RS-232 RTS CTS Selection ............................................................... 6-112 Single Cable RS-232 Use BCC ............................................................................. 6-115 Single Cable RS-232 Use ACK/NAK ...................................................................... 6-116 Single Cable RS-232 Use STX ............................................................................. 6-117 Set Single Cable RS-232 STX Character ............................................................... 6-118 Single Cable RS-232 Use ETX ............................................................................. 6-119 Set Single Cable RS-232 ETX Character ............................................................... 6-120 Symbology Programming ......................................................................................... 6-121 4 Magellan® 9500 UPC-A Enable ......................................................................................................... 6-121 UPC-A Number System Character Transmission .................................................... 6-122 UPC-A Check Character Transmission .................................................................. 6-123 Expand UPC-A to EAN-13 ................................................................................... 6-124 UPC/EAN AIM ID ............................................................................................... 6-125 UPC-A Label ID ................................................................................................. 6-126 UPC-A 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID .................................................................. 6-127 UPC-A 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID .................................................................. 6-128 UPC-A 128 Supplemental Label ID ....................................................................... 6-129 UPC-E Enable ......................................................................................................... 6-130 UPC-E Number System Character Transmission ..................................................... 6-131 UPC-E Check Character Transmission ................................................................... 6-132 Expand UPC-E to UPC-A ..................................................................................... 6-133 Expand UPC-E to EAN-13 ................................................................................... 6-134 UPC-E Label ID ................................................................................................. 6-135 UPC-E 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID ................................................................... 6-136 UPC-E 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID ................................................................... 6-137 UPC-E 128 Supplemental Label ID ....................................................................... 6-138 EAN-13 Enable ....................................................................................................... 6-139 EAN-13 First Character Transmission ................................................................... 6-140 EAN-13 Check Character Transmission ................................................................. 6-141 EAN-13 ISBN Conversion Enable ......................................................................... 6-142 EAN 13 Label ID ............................................................................................... 6-143 EAN-13 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID ................................................................. 6-144 EAN-13 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID ................................................................. 6-145 EAN-13 128 Supplemental Label ID ..................................................................... 6-146 Bookland AIM ID ............................................................................................... 6-147 Bookland Label ID ............................................................................................. 6-148 EAN-8 Enable ......................................................................................................... 6-149 EAN-8 Check Character Transmission .................................................................. 6-150 Expand EAN-8 to EAN-13 ................................................................................... 6-151 EAN 8 Label ID ................................................................................................. 6-152 EAN-8 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID .................................................................. 6-153 EAN-8 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID .................................................................. 6-154 EAN-8 128 Supplemental Label ID ....................................................................... 6-155 EAN-8 Decoding Levels ...................................................................................... 6-156 Other UPC/EAN Options ........................................................................................... 6-159 UPC/EAN Reconstruction .................................................................................... 6-160 Price Weight Check ........................................................................................... 6-161 Enable EAN Two Label ....................................................................................... 6-164 Addons ............................................................................................................ 6-165 UPC-A and EAN-13 Decoding Levels .................................................................... 6-167 GTIN Enable ........................................................................................................... 6-170 GTIN Label ID .................................................................................................. 6-171 GTIN 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID .................................................................... 6-172 GTIN 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID .................................................................... 6-173 GTIN Code 128 Supplemental Label ID ................................................................ 6-174 RSS-14 Enable ....................................................................................................... 6-175 Product Reference Guide 5 RSS-14 Check Character Transmission ................................................................. 6-176 RSS-14/EAN-128 Emulation ............................................................................... 6-177 RSS-14 2D Component Enable ............................................................................ 6-178 RSS-14 AIM ID ................................................................................................. 6-179 RSS-14 Label ID ............................................................................................... 6-180 RSS Expanded Enable .............................................................................................. 6-181 RSS Expanded EAN-128 Emulation ...................................................................... 6-182 RSS Expanded 2D Component Enable .................................................................. 6-183 RSS Expanded AIM ID ....................................................................................... 6-184 RSS Expanded Label ID ..................................................................................... 6-185 RSS Expanded Length Control ............................................................................. 6-186 RSS Expanded Maximum Label Length ................................................................. 6-187 RSS Expanded Minimum Label Length .................................................................. 6-188 RSS Expanded Fixed Length 1 ............................................................................. 6-189 RSS Expanded Fixed Length 2 ............................................................................. 6-190 Code 39 Enable ....................................................................................................... 6-191 Code 39 Start Stop Character Transmission .......................................................... 6-192 Code 39 Check Character Calculation ................................................................... 6-193 Code 39 Check Character Transmission ................................................................ 6-194 Code 39 Full ASCII ............................................................................................ 6-195 Code 39 AIM ID ................................................................................................ 6-196 Code 39 Label ID .............................................................................................. 6-197 Code 39 Length Control ..................................................................................... 6-198 Code 39 Maximum Label Length .......................................................................... 6-199 Code 39 Minimum Label Length .......................................................................... 6-200 Code 39 Fixed Length 1 ..................................................................................... 6-201 Code 39 Fixed Length 2 ..................................................................................... 6-202 Code 39 Stitching .............................................................................................. 6-203 Pharmacode 39 Enable ............................................................................................. 6-204 Pharmacode 39 Start Stop Character Transmission ................................................ 6-205 Pharmacode 39 Check Character Transmission ...................................................... 6-206 Pharmacode 39 Label ID .................................................................................... 6-207 Code 128 Enable ..................................................................................................... 6-208 Code 128 Transmit Function Characters ............................................................... 6-209 Convert Code 128 to Code 39 ............................................................................. 6-210 Code 128 AIM ID .............................................................................................. 6-211 Code 128 Label ID ............................................................................................ 6-212 Code 128 Length Control .................................................................................... 6-213 Code 128 Maximum Label Length ........................................................................ 6-214 Code 128 Minimum Label Length ......................................................................... 6-215 Code 128 Fixed Length 1 .................................................................................... 6-216 Code 128 Fixed Length 2 .................................................................................... 6-217 Code 128 Stitching ............................................................................................ 6-218 EAN-128 Enable ...................................................................................................... 6-219 EAN-128 AIM ID ............................................................................................... 6-220 EAN-128 Label ID ............................................................................................. 6-221 Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) Enable ............................................................................ 6-222 I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation .................................................................... 6-223 6 Magellan® 9500 I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission ................................................................. 6-224 I 2 of 5 AIM ID ................................................................................................. 6-225 I 2 of 5 Label ID ............................................................................................... 6-226 I 2 of 5 Length Control ...................................................................................... 6-227 I 2 of 5 Maximum Label Length ........................................................................... 6-228 I 2 of 5 Minimum Label Length ............................................................................ 6-229 I 2 of 5 Fixed Length 1 ...................................................................................... 6-230 I 2 of 5 Fixed Length 2 ...................................................................................... 6-231 I 2 of 5 Stitching ............................................................................................... 6-232 Codabar Enable ...................................................................................................... 6-233 Codabar Start Stop Character Transmission .......................................................... 6-234 Codabar Start Stop Character Set ....................................................................... 6-235 Codabar Start Stop Character Match .................................................................... 6-237 Codabar Check Character Calculation ................................................................... 6-238 Codabar Check Character Transmission ................................................................ 6-239 Codabar AIM ID ................................................................................................ 6-240 Codabar Label ID .............................................................................................. 6-241 Codabar Length Control ..................................................................................... 6-242 Codabar Maximum Label Length ......................................................................... 6-243 Codabar Minimum Label Length .......................................................................... 6-244 Codabar Fixed Length 1 ..................................................................................... 6-245 Codabar Fixed Length 2 ..................................................................................... 6-246 Codabar Stitching ............................................................................................. 6-247 Code 93 Enable ...................................................................................................... 6-248 Code 93 AIM ID ................................................................................................ 6-249 Code 93 Label ID .............................................................................................. 6-250 Code 93 Length Control ..................................................................................... 6-251 Code 93 Maximum Label Length .......................................................................... 6-252 Code 93 Minimum Label Length .......................................................................... 6-253 Code 93 Fixed Length 1 ..................................................................................... 6-254 Code 93 Fixed Length 2 ..................................................................................... 6-255 Code 93 Stitching ............................................................................................. 6-256 MSI/Plessey Enable ................................................................................................. 6-257 MSI/Plessey Check Character Calculation ............................................................. 6-258 MSI/Plessey Number of Check Characters ............................................................ 6-259 MSI/Plessey Check Character Transmission .......................................................... 6-260 MSI/Plessey AIM ID ........................................................................................... 6-261 MSI/Plessey Label ID ......................................................................................... 6-262 MSI/Plessey Length Control ................................................................................ 6-263 MSI/Plessey Maximum Label Length .................................................................... 6-264 MSI/Plessey Minimum Label Length ..................................................................... 6-265 MSI/Plessey Fixed Length 1 ................................................................................ 6-266 MSI/Plessey Fixed Length 2 ................................................................................ 6-267 MSI/Plessey Stitching ........................................................................................ 6-268 Standard 2 of 5 Enable ............................................................................................ 6-269 Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation ........................................................ 6-270 Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission ..................................................... 6-271 Standard 2 of 5 AIM ID ...................................................................................... 6-272 Product Reference Guide 7 Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 of of of of of of of 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Label ID .................................................................................... 6-273 Length Control ........................................................................... 6-274 Maximum Label Length ............................................................... 6-275 Minimum Label Length ................................................................ 6-276 Fixed Length 1 ........................................................................... 6-277 Fixed Length 2 ........................................................................... 6-278 Stitching ................................................................................... 6-279 Appendix A. LED/Beeper Indications & Controls ................................. A-1 Controls and Indicators ............................................................................................... A-2 LED and Beeper Indications ................................................................................... A-2 Volume/Tone Push Button ..................................................................................... A-6 Manual EAS Deactivation Push Button ..................................................................... A-8 Scale Zero Push Button ......................................................................................... A-9 Calibration Switch ...............................................................................................A-10 Appendix B. Cable Information............................................................ B-1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. General Specifications .......................................................................................... RS-232 Cable Pinout ................................................................................................... Scanner .............................................................................................................. RS-232 Cable Pinout — continued ................................................................................ Scale .................................................................................................................. IBM Cable Pinout ........................................................................................................ Scanner and Scale ............................................................................................... IBM USB Cable Pinout ................................................................................................. Scanner and Scale ............................................................................................... Auxilliary Port ............................................................................................................ External Handheld Input ....................................................................................... Power Cable .............................................................................................................. Connector Hardware ............................................................................................. Remote Display .......................................................................................................... Connector Hardware ............................................................................................. EAS Comm Port ......................................................................................................... EAS Deactivator Control Box Connection ................................................................. B-1 B-1 B-2 B-2 B-3 B-3 B-4 B-4 B-5 B-5 B-6 B-6 B-7 B-7 B-8 B-8 B-9 B-9 Appendix C. Keypad............................................................................. C-1 Appendix D. Host Commands............................................................... D-1 Accepting Commands from an RS-232 Scanner Host ....................................................... D-1 Appendix E. Factory Defaults............................................................... E-1 Appendix F. Handheld Data Format Requirements............................... F-1 Handheld Data Format Requirements General ...........................................................F-1 Datalogic Handheld Data Format Requirements .........................................................F-2 AIM Formats ...................................................................................................... F-10 8 Magellan® 9500 DATALOGIC SCANNING, INC. MAGELLAN® END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT Notice to End User: The Datalogic Product you have acquired contains embedded Software, which is integral to the product's operation. This Software is being provided to you under license, subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement. If you use the Datalogic Product, you will be deemed to have accepted the terms and conditions of this Agreement. If you do not intend to be bound to the terms of this Agreement, Datalogic is not willing to license the Software to you, you may not use the Datalogic Product or the Software, and you must contact the party from whom you acquired the Datalogic Product for instructions. This End User Software License Agreement ("Agreement") is a legally binding agreement governing the licensing of the Software and Documentation by Datalogic,Scanning Holdings, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates ("Datalogic") to the entity or person who has purchased or otherwise acquired a Datalogic Product ("End User"). For purposes of this Agreement, any software that is associated with a separate end-user license agreement is licensed to you under the terms of that license agreement. Datalogic and End User hereby agree as follows: 1. Definitions. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 "Documentation" means materials such as user's guides, program reference guides, quick reference guides, manuals, or similar materials associated with or related to the Datalogic Product, whether in printed, "online", or other form. "Proprietary Information" means: (a) source code, object code, software, documentation, and any related internal design, system design, data base design, algorithms, technology, technical data or information, implementation techniques, and trade secrets related to the Software, (b) any other trade secrets marked appropriately or identified as proprietary or confidential, and (c) any information that End User, under the circumstances, should recognize as confidential. Proprietary Information does not include any information that the receiving party can establish was (1) in the public domain, (2) already in the receiving party's possession or rightfully known prior to receipt, (3) rightfully learned from a third party not in violation of any other's proprietary rights, or (4) independently developed without access to Proprietary Information. "Datalogic Product" means the Datalogic Magellan® 1000i series, Magellan® 1400i series, Magellan® 8100 series, Magellan® 8200 series, Magellan® 8300 series, Magellan® 8400 series, Magellan® 8500 series, Magellan® 9500 series, and/or Magellan SL® series scanner and/or scanner/scale product, including all embedded Software in and all Documentation related to such product, which has been purchased or otherwise acquired by End User, whether obtained directly or indirectly from Datalogic. "Software" means any software or computer programs of Datalogic or its third party licensors in machine readable form which is embedded in the Datalogic Product, whether obtained directly or indirectly from Datalogic, including any replacement, update, upgrade, enhancement or modification. 2. Scope Of License Granted. 2.1 2.2 Datalogic grants to End User a non-exclusive, non-transferable, perpetual license to use the Software, solely on the Datalogic Product in which it is embedded ("designated Datalogic Product"), in machine-readable form only, solely for End User's internal business purposes. This Agreement does not convey ownership of the Software to End User. Title to the Software shall be and remain with Datalogic or the third party from whom Datalogic has obtained a licensed right. As used in this Agreement, the term "purchase" or its equivalents when applied to the Software shall mean "acquire under license." End User is not entitled to receipt or use of the source code to any Software. End User shall not copy, modify, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, or otherwise reproduce or remanufacture the Software, whether modified or unmodified, nor sell, assign, sublicense, distribute, lend, rent, give, or otherwise transfer the Software to any other person or organization, for purposes other than as expressly provided in this Agreement, without Datalogic's prior written consent. 3. Transfers, Support. 3.1 3.2 3.3 Any copying, installing, reproduction, remanufacture, reverse engineering, electronic transfer, or other use of the Software on other than the designated Datalogic Product will be a material breach of this Agreement. However, Datalogic may elect not to terminate this Agreement or the granted licenses, but instead may elect to notify End User that End User is deemed to have ordered and accepted a license for each breaching use. End User shall pay Datalogic the applicable list price for such licenses as of the date of such breach. End User shall not sell, assign, sublicense, distribute, lend, rent, give, or otherwise transfer the Datalogic Product to any third party unless such third party agrees with Datalogic in writing to be bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Any such transfer of the Datalogic Product absent such agreement shall be null and void. End User may obtain support for Software from Datalogic at Datalogic's standard support fees and under Datalogic's standard support terms and conditions in effect at the time the support is requested. 4. Intellectual Property. End User acknowledges that the Software constitutes valuable trade secrets of Datalogic or Datalogic's third party licensors and that the Software is protected by intellectual property laws and treaties. The license set forth in this Agreement does not transfer to End User any ownership of Datalogic's or its third party licensors' copyrights, patents, trademarks, service marks, trade secrets, or other intellectual property rights and End User shall have no right to commence any legal actions to obtain such rights. End User shall not remove, modify, or take any other action that would obscure any copyright, trademark, patent marking, or other intellectual property notices contained in or on the Datalogic Product. 5. Proprietary Information. 5.1 5.2 5.3 End User acknowledges that Proprietary Information is the confidential, proprietary, and trade secret property of Datalogic and Datalogic's third party licensors and End User acquires no right or interest in any Proprietary Information. End User shall not disclose, provide, or otherwise make available the Proprietary Information of Datalogic or its third party licensors to any person other than End User's authorized employees or agents who are under confidentiality agreement, and End User shall not use the Proprietary Information other than in conjunction with use of the Datalogic Product exclusively for End User's internal business purposes. End User shall take steps to protect the Proprietary Information no less securely than if it were End User's own intellectual property. The provisions of this Proprietary Information Section shall survive and continue for five (5) years after the termination of this Agreement. 6. Limited Warranty. 6.1 Datalogic warrants that, under normal use and operation, the Datalogic Product will conform substantially to the applicable Documentation for the period specified in the Documentation. During this period, for all reproducible nonconformities for which Datalogic has been given written notice, Datalogic will use commercially reasonable efforts to remedy nonconformities verified by Datalogic. End User agrees to supply Datalogic with all reasonably requested information and assistance necessary to help Datalogic in remedying such nonconformities. For all defects reported to Datalogic within the warranty period, Datalogic's liability is limited to providing End User with one copy of corrections or responding to End User's problem reports accord- Product Reference Guide 9 6.2 ing to Datalogic's standard assistance practices. Datalogic does not warrant that the product will meet End User's requirements or that use of the product will be uninterrupted or error free, or that Datalogic's remedial efforts will correct any nonconformance. This limited warranty does not cover any product that has been subjected to damage or abuse, whether intentionally, accidentally, or by neglect, or to unauthorized repair or unauthorized installation, and shall be void if End User modifies the product, uses the product in any manner other than as established in the Documentation, or if End User breaches any of the provisions of this Agreement. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THIS AGREEMENT, THE DATALOGIC PRODUCT IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND DATALOGIC MAKES NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WRITTEN OR ORAL, WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. 7. Infringement. 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 Datalogic will defend End User against any claim in a lawsuit that the Datalogic Product furnished hereunder infringe a United States patent or copyright of a third party and Datalogic will pay any damages finally awarded against End User by a court of competent jurisdiction that are attributable to such claim or will pay End User's part of any settlement that is attributable to such claim, provided, that 1) End User notifies Datalogic promptly in writing of the claim, 2) Datalogic controls the defense or settlement of the claim, and 3) End User cooperates fully with Datalogic in such defense or settlement. All notices of a claim should be sent to Datalogic Scanning Holdings, Inc., Legal Department, 959 Terry Street, Eugene, OR 97402. In the defense or settlement of any such claim, Datalogic may, at its option, 1) procure for End User the right to continue using the Datalogic Product, 2) modify the Datalogic Product so that it becomes non-infringing, 3) replace the Datalogic Product with an equivalent product not subject to such claim, or 4) provide End User an opportunity to return the Datalogic Product and receive a refund of the purchase price paid, less a reasonable allowance for use. Datalogic shall have no liability to End User for claims of infringement based upon 1) the use of any Datalogic Product in combination with any product which Datalogic has not either furnished or authorized for use with such Datalogic Product 2) the use of any Datalogic Product designed, manufactured, or modified to the specifications of End User, or 3) End User's modification of the Datalogic Product without written authorization from Datalogic. THE FOREGOING STATES DATALOGIC'S COMPLETE AND ENTIRE OBLIGATION CONCERNING CLAIMS OF PATENT, COPYRIGHT, OR OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY INFRINGEMENT, CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES ANY PRIOR AGREEMENTS, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, BETWEEN THE PARTIES CONCERNING SUCH CLAIMS, AND WILL NOT BE MODIFIED OR AMENDED BY ANY PAST, CONTEMPORANEOUS, OR FUTURE AGREEMENTS OR DEALINGS BETWEEN THE PARTIES, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN A FUTURE WRITING SIGNED BY BOTH PARTIES. 8. Limitation Of Liability. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN SECTION 7, DATALOGIC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIMS AGAINST END USER BY ANY OTHER PARTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL DATALOGIC'S LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, IF ANY, WHETHER BASED UPON CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), PRODUCT LIABILITY, STRICT LIABILITY, WARRANTY, OR ANY OTHER BASIS, EXCEED THE PRICE OR FEE PAID BY END USER FOR THE DATALOGIC PRODUCT. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL DATALOGIC BE LIABLE TO END USER OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS OR SERVICE, OR FOR ANY OTHER SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, CONTINGENT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, EXEMPLARY, OR OTHER SIMILAR DAMAGES, EVEN IF DATALOGIC HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. 9. Government Restricted Rights; International Use. 9.1 9.2 Use, duplication, or disclosure of the Software by the U.S. Government is subject to the restrictions for computer software developed at private expense as set forth in the U.S. Federal Acquisition Regulations at FAR 52.227-14(g), or 52.227-19 or in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013(c)(1)(ii), whichever is applicable. If End User is using the Datalogic Product outside of the United States, End User must comply with the applicable local laws of the country in which the Datalogic Product is used, with U.S. export control laws, and with the English language version of this Agreement. The provisions of the "United Nations Convention on International Sale of Goods" shall not apply to this Agreement. 10. Termination. 10.1 10.2 Either party may terminate this Agreement or any license granted under this Agreement at any time upon written notice if the other party breaches any provision of this Agreement. Upon termination of this Agreement, End User immediately shall cease using any non-embedded software and shall return to Datalogic or destroy all non-embedded software covered by this Agreement, and shall furnish Datalogic with a certificate of compliance with this provision signed by an officer or authorized representative of End User. For embedded software, End User agrees to sign a waiver prepared by Datalogic concerning further use of the embedded Software. End User's resumed or continued use of the embedded Software after termination shall constitute End User's agreement to be bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement for such use. 11. General Provisions. 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 Entire Agreement; Amendment. This document contains the entire agreement between the parties relating to the licensing of the Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous agreements, written or oral, between the parties concerning the licensing of the Software. This Agreement may not be changed, amended, or modified except by written document signed by Datalogic. Notice. All notices required or authorized under this Agreement shall be given in writing, and shall be effective when received, with evidence of receipt. Notices to Datalogic shall be sent to the attention of Contract Administration, Datalogic Scanning Holdings, Inc., 959 Terry Street, Eugene, OR 97402, or such other address as may be specified by Datalogic in writing. Waiver. A party's failure to enforce any of the terms and conditions of this Agreement shall not prevent the party's later enforcement of such terms and conditions. Governing Law; Venue: This Agreement and the rights of the parties hereunder shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Oregon U.S.A, without regard to the rules governing conflicts of law. The state or federal courts of the State of Oregon located in either Multnomah or Lane counties shall have exclusive jurisdiction over all matters regarding this Agreement, except that Datalogic shall have the right, at its absolute discretion, to initiate proceedings in the courts of any other state, country, or territory in which End User resides, or in which any of End User's assets are located. Attorneys’ Fees. In the event an action is brought to enforce the terms and conditions of this Agreement, the prevailing party shall be entitled to reasonable attorneys' fees, both at trial and on appeal. - END - 10 Magellan® 9500 Chapter 1 Introduction This Product Reference Guide contains comprehensive instructions on how to install the scanner or scanner/scale (either model may be termed “scanner” for the purpose of simplicity in this manual), how to program it using special programming feature bar code labels, and advanced user information as described in the following overview. Manual Overview Chapter 1, Introduction, presents the manual’s contents, describes features and specifications, provides regulatory and safety information, and lists the bar code symbologies the scanner will read. Chapter 2, Site Preparation and Installation, supplies physical dimensions for the scanner or scanner/scale and its most common accessories, and details counter preparation and installation. Cable routing, connection and testing are also explained in this chapter. Chapter 3, Operation and Maintenance, describes use and maintenance; providing details about operator controls, programming and diagnostic modes, scale “zeroing” and calibration. Scanner and scale routine maintenance are outlined in this chapter as well. Chapter 4, Problem Isolation, provides an outline of three scanner/scale test modes: Selftest, Operational Tests and Diagnostic Tests. Descriptions of the error indications if the scanner detects a system problem and troubleshooting flowcharts to aid in problem resolution are also presented. Chapter 5, Calibration, explains scale calibration and verification proce- dures, including procedures for calibrating the scale in pounds as well as kilograms. Product Reference Guide 1-1 Chapter 6, Programming, details procedures and provides custom bar- codes for setting programmable scanner and scanner/scale features. This chapter is organized by the categories: General Features, Interface Related Features and Symbology Related Features. Appendix A, LED/Beeper Indications & Controls, lists the various functions and indications of the scanner/scale control panel features. Appendix B, Cable Information, outlines wire requirements, connector specifications and pinout details for associated product cabling. Appendix C, Keypad, furnishes bar codes representing the digits and characters required to enter extended programming data needed during certain programming sessions. Appendix D, Host Commands, contains a partial listing of available host commands that can be used with a compatible host interface. Appendix E, Factory Defaults, is a table providing factory default pro- grammable settings for common interfaces. Appendix F, Handheld Data Format Requirements, provides application notes describing the general format of data accepted by the scanner through the auxilliary port as transmitted from a handheld scanner. How to Use This Manual You’ll find it helpful to familiarize yourself with the first chapter of this manual, since it provides both a general description of the product’s features and an overview of the manual’s contents and organization. Reference the other chapters as required for information about scanner or scanner/scale installation, operation, maintenance, calibration and bar code programming. 1-2 Magellan® 9500 Manual Overview Manual Conventions ‘NOTE’ blocks contain information that is helpful and recommended. They provide information that is critical to operations and/or procedures described in this manual. LEGAL NOTE ‘LEGAL NOTE’ blocks indicate procedures or activities which may be regulated under law by governmental agencies. It is your responsibility to ensure compliance with the regulations that govern installation of weighing devices. ‘CAUTION’ blocks inform you that proper handling (adherence to the procedures described) is required to avoid damage to equipment and/or property. ‘WARNING’ blocks alert you to potential physical harm or injury. These statements do not include potentially fatal hazards, which would be designated as ‘DANGER’ blocks. Use of this product does not warrant the need for a DANGER block. Product Reference Guide 1-3 Scanner and Scanner/Scale Nomenclature Controls, indicators and other nomenclature are shown in Figure 1-1. Figure 1-1. Scanner/Scale Nomenclature Volume/Tone Push Button Scanner LED (Green) Weighing Surface — Lean Oversize Produce Here Scale LED (Yellow) EAS LED (Tri-Color) Bonnet Scale Zero Push Button Manual EAS Deactivation Push Button Vertical Window Horizontal Window Produce Rail All Weighs™ Platter 1-4 Magellan® 9500 Scanner and Scanner/Scale Nomenclature Connectors The appearance of the connector panel will vary depending upon the factory options purchased with your model. Reference Figure 1-2. Figure 1-2. Connector Panel 0.00 POS Terminal POS TERMINAL Remote Display Aux. Port Scale Host REMOTE DISPLAY AUXILLIARY PORT · Label Data Drives Remote Display · Scale Data (for single cable interfaces) · Application Download (where appropriate) Models with scale only Product Reference Guide SCALE HOST · Test Port Scale Data (dual · On Screen cable scanner/scale) Programming (OSP) · Application Download · RS-232 Handheld Scanner Input · Auxilliary RS-232 Label Data Output Connection to this port is Optional Power POWER AC Brick Input OR Power off Terminal (POT) Brick Input EAS Port EAS PORT Connection to external Sensormatic® ScanMax ProTM controller box. Controls EAS deactivation system. Dual cable units only. (Scale connection may be handled through POS Terminal port) 1-5 Physical Parameters This chapter provides specifications for performance, environmental and electrical parameters. Reference the second chapter of this manual, Site Preparation and Installation, for physical measurements of all models and some accessories. Scanning The scanner has a scan zone between the two windows where the scanner projects laser light in order to scan items. Two separate projections, one from the horizontal window and one from the vertical window, combine to form a zone where bar code labels are read. Refer to Chapter 3, "Scanning Items" for more information. Deactivating EAS Tags Deactivation of Sensormatic® ScanMax ProTM EAS (Electronic Article Surveillance) anti-theft labels is an additional function that can be performed by the scanner. More information about this feature can be referenced under the following topics: 1-6 • Chapter 2, "EAS Considerations" • Chapter 3, "Deactivating Security Labels" • Chapter 6, "EAS Features" Magellan® 9500 Physical Parameters Weighing Specifications for scale capacity, settling time, minimum and maximum static weight, zeroing, and warm-up time are given below. For more information regarding the topic: Proper Weighing Technique, refer to the Operation and Maintenance chapter of this manual. Rated Weight Capacity The scale’s operational weight capacity is: • 30.00 pounds, displayed in 0.01 increments OR • 15.000 kilograms1, displayed in 0.005 increments. Minimum Increment The minimum weight that can be accurately measured by the scale is 0.02 lb. (0.005 kg). Maximum Static Weight (Overload) A maximum static weight of 150 pounds (68 kg) can be sustained by the scale without incurring damage or degrading performance. Automatic Zero Maintenance The scale’s software constantly monitors and adjusts the Zero point as long as the deviation is within acceptable limits2, while compensating for any debris accumulation or removal. During power-up, the scale automatically re-zeros after verifying that all subsystems are functional. Additionally, the scale may be manually “zeroed” by pushing the Scale Zero Push Button located on the top of the vertical enclosure. 1. The scale can also be set for 9.99 kg max. 2. Acceptable limitis of deviation are set at -0.2 to +0.6 pounds (-0.078kg to 0.23kg), which is -0.67 to +2.0% of total capacity. Product Reference Guide 1-7 Warm-Up Time There are two pertinent warm-up times that apply to the scanner or scanner/scale: The two warm-up periods can be performed concurrently, thereby reducing the total required warm-up time to 60 minutes. NOTE Thermal Equilibrium When the unit is moved from a cooler temperature (such as a storage area) to a warmer environment (such as a checkstand location), 60 minutes must be allowed to acclimate the unit to ambient conditions prior to calibration or operation. Power-up Once installed and powered up, a warm-up time of 15 minutes must be allowed before calibrating or performing weighing operations. User Configurable Warm-up The user may configure the unit for a pre-programmed warm-up time that is activated every time the scanner is powered up. During this time, the scale is viewed by the POS terminal as off-line. Contact technical support to learn more about this advanced programmable feature. NOTE 1-8 Magellan® 9500 Physical Parameters Figure 1-3. Environmental Specifications Operation +40 C 10 C +104 F 50 F Temperature 10 to +40 C 50 to +104 F Illumination Artificial Light: 0-450 Foot-candles (4,842 LUX) Dust Resistant Optics Cavity, IP5X Sunlight: 0-8,000 Foot-candles (86,080 LUX) Spill Proof (Datalogic MS-0006-13-0004) Humidity Hot / Wet 40°C / 95% RH Hot / Dry 40°C / 5% RH Cold / Dry 10°C / 5% RH Warm / Wet 25%C / 50% RH Storage +70 C -40 C POS +158 F -40 F Scan ner Temperature -40 to +70 C -40 to +158 F Product Reference Guide 1-9 Electrical Specifications Before installation, always verify that the site’s electrical service meets the scanner/scale’s requirements. The scanner has been engineered for compatibility with most international electrical systems operating in ranges from 100 to 240VAC at 50-60 Hz. Verify that the power source will supply “clean” electrical power to the equipment; that is, it must be free of excess electrical noise. Check the IEC power cord shipped with the scanner/scale. If the cord will not plug into your AC power receptacle, the power cord shipped is not compatible with your electrical system. Please contact your distributor immediately to receive the necessary information and components to ensure electrical compatibility. Power Supply The scanner utilizes a single power supply for all models. Unique installation and international connections are accomplished through selection of the proper IEC power cord VOLTAGE FREQUENCY PART NUMBER 100-240VAC ±10% 50-60 Hz 8-0582 Safe operation of your scanner or scanner/scale requires properly grounded electrical outlets. Be sure to have a qualified electrician certify the earthground connection on circuits which will be used to power the unit. CAUTION The scanner is powered on/off by connecting/disconnecting its AC power supply. NOTE 1-10 Magellan® 9500 Laser and Product Safety Laser and Product Safety Laser safety requirements are based on IEC Standard Publication 60825-1 (2001) and CDRH 21CFR, Chapter 1, Subchapter J and (CDRH) Laser Product Performance Standard, User information [1040.10(h)1]: • User Maintenance. No user maintenance of the system other than cleaning of the scan windows is required. • Radiant Energy. The scanner is an IEC Class 1 and CDRH IIa laser product. The system uses two embedded Class 3B Visible Laser Diodes (VLDs). No attempt should be made by the user to remove the protective housing of the scanner/scale. • Laser Light Viewing. The horizontal and vertical scan windows are the only apertures through which laser light may be observed in this product. Exposure to the light emitted from the scan windows has been shown not to be harmful. The safety record of bar code scanning is perfect after millions of hours of use worldwide. This safe and efficient use of laser technology has gained wide acceptance in industries throughout the world. Operators and installers of the unit should observe the following cautions and warnings: Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous laser light exposure. CAUTION The use of optical instruments with the scanner will increase eye hazard. (Optical instruments include binoculars, microscopes, telescopes and magnifying glasses. This does not include eyeglasses worn by the user). To prevent exposure to laser light, do not remove the protective housing of the scanner. There are no user-serviceable parts inside your scanner or scanner/scale. Product Reference Guide 1-11 Safety precautions to be taken: No adjustments or alteration of the scanner or scanner/scale housing are to be attempted by the user. CAUTION WARNING The failure of the facet wheel motor while the unit is continuing to emit a laser beam causes the emission levels to exceed those for inherently safe operation. The unit has safeguards to prevent this occurrence. If, however, a stationary laser beam is ever emitted, the failing unit should be disconnected from its power supply until repaired by a qualified technician. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his or her own expense. This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Cet appareil numerique de la classe A respecte toute les exigences du Reglement sur le material broilleur du Canada. 1-12 Magellan® 9500 Labeling Labeling Regulatory, reference and safety labeling is shown in Figure 1-4. Figure 1-4. Labeling III N max = 3000 Max 15 kg Min 0.1 kg e = 0.005 kg Max 30 lbs Min 0.2 lb e = 0.01 lb Or... Located on EAS Single-Antenna models n max= 3000 III emin= .01 lb NTEP: 02 - 043 AM - 5454 IEC CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT CAPACITE 15.000 x .005 kg CAPACITY 30.00 x .01 lb +10°c to +40°c 6-0928 Class IIa Laser Product. Avoid long term viewing of direct laser light. Appareil à laser de classe IIa. Éviter toute exposition prolongée de la vue à lumière laser directe. Producto Laser Clase lla. Evite mirar, de manera continua, directamente a la luz del laser. U.S., CANADA, MEXICO AND JAPAN +10°C/+40°C 90/384/EEC Located inside Optics Chassis M Located on Spider Assembly (Scale Models ONLY) Two labels located on EAS Dual-Antenna models • CAUTION - CLASS 3R LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID DIRECT EYE EXPOSURE. • ATTENTION - RAYONNEMENT LASER DE CLASSE 3R CARTER OUVERT. EVITEZ L'EXPOSITION DIRECTE DE L'OEIL. • ACHTUNG - NACH ÖFFNUNG LASERSTRAHLUNG NACH KLASSE 3R AUGENKONTAKT MIT LASERSTRAHL VERMEIDEN. • PRECAUCIÓN - CUANDO ABIERTO, EMITE RAYO LASER DE LA CLASE 3R. • ADVERTÊNCIA - QUANDO ABERTO, EMITE RAIO DE LASER DA CLASSE 3R. • ATTENZIONE - RADIAZIONI LASER CLASSE 3R SE APERTO. EVITARE L'ESPOSIZIONE DIRETTA AGLI OCCHI. • VARNING - KLASS 3R LASERSTRÅLNING UTAN FÖRSLUTNING. UNDVIK DIREKT ÖGONKONTAKT. Sa tes fet ted n ctio du red Pro nito mo y This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. • • • Product of USA PRODUCT SERVICE N263 NRTL CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 CATAGORIA 1 PRODUCTO LASER APPAREIL Á LASER DE CLASSE 1 based on 10 sec; IEC 60825-1:2001 U S THIS LASER PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21CFR 1040 AS APPLICABLE AS A CLASS IIA PRODUCT This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ECES-003. Cet appareil numérique de la Classe A est confirme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. Input: 50 - 60 Hz (0.5 - 0.25A) 90 - 265VAC (P/N 8-0559) COVERED BY ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING U.S. PATENTS: 4,709,195 4,709,369 4,712,853 4,749,879 4,786,798 4,792,666 4,798,943 4,799,164 4,816,660 4,861,972 4,861,973 4,866,257 4,868,836 4,879,456 4,963,719 4,991,692 5,144,118 5,179,270 5,198,649 5,247,162 5,229,588 5,410,108 5,459,308 5,440,110 5,475,207 5,493,108 5,705,802 5,723,852 5,834,708 5,929,421 6,059,189 6,237,852 RE37,166 OTHER PATENTS PENDING Power: 18 Watts (max) Output: +5V at 2.0A +12V at 0.7A 0.00 POS Terminal Remote Display Aux. Port Scale Host Power EAS Port MAGELLAN 9500 This illustration shows general label placement ONLY. Actual label appearance and location may vary. View the labels on the product, or contact your nearest sales or service office for regulatory, patent and other information. Product Reference Guide 1-13 Agency Compliances The scanner and scanner/scale meets or exceeds the requirements for its device type as set forth by the following agencies and regulations: COUNTRY COMPLIANCE COMMENTS Electrical United States UL 60950 TÜV NRTL/UL Canada CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950 TÜV NRTL/UL World IEC60950 / IEC 825-1:2001 TÜV CB Emmisions United States 47CFR Part 15J FCC Canada ICES-0003 Class B Europe EN 55022 Class B Safety & Emissions EMC Directive 89/336/EEC CE Mark LV Directive 73/23/EEC CE Mark Laser Safety United States CDRH, 21CFR Part 1040 CDRH Class IIa laser device Canada same as CDRH SGM-1 specification Weights & Measures United States NIST Handbook 44 (Dept. of Commerce) Canada Measures Canada New York New York Certificate EU 90/384/EEC Directive NWML OImL R76-1 and R76-2 NSC Contact Datalogic® Product Marketing at (541) 683-5700, or your Datalogic representative for a complete listing of approvals for other countries. 1-14 Magellan® 9500 Bar Codes Supported Bar Codes Supported The scanner can read/decode the following bar code types (symbologies): • UPC Versions A & E • UPC Supplementals and Add-ons (2 & 5 digit supplimentals, Coupon code and Code 128) • Plural Stage Dual UPC Bar Codes for Japan ( 2 label read) • Reduced Space Symbology (RSS) RSS-14, RSS expanded, RSS Stacked • EAN-8 & 13 • JAN-8 & 13 • UCC/EAN-128 • Code 39 • Code 39 full ASCII • Code 128 (including conversion to Code 39) • Code 93 • Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) • Italian Pharmacode (Code 39) • Codabar • MSI/Plessey Product Reference Guide 1-15 NOTES 1-16 Magellan® 9500 Chapter 2 Site Preparation and Installation This chapter provides a reference for preparing most checkstands to receive the scanner or scanner/scale. Included are physical parameters and instructions for checkstand preparation, power and ventilation considerations, cable routing information and unit installation. Site Preparation lists all procedures necessary to prepare the checkstand. The instructions that follow, titled Checkstand Preparation, detail steps for the three models that are available (shown in Figure 2-1 below) to facilitate easy installation into almost any checkstand application around the world: Model 9501 — Scanner only Model 9502 — Scanner/Scale Some models are designed to fit with little or no modification into openings cut for previously installed scanners such as Magellan® scanners, or NCR® scanner models 7820/24 and 7870. Other models are designed for applications with smaller footprint requirements. Once the procedures in this chapter are complete, the scanner is ready for scanning operation1; with the exception that if a scanner/scale was installed, calibration will be required before placing the unit into operation. You must consult the local weights and measures authority to ensure that all legal requirements are met concerning calibration and certification. Chapter 5, Calibration, contains detailed procedures for calibrating the scale in either pounds or kilograms. 1. Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) operation requires the installation of the Sensormatic® ScanMax ProTM antenna and controller. Product Reference Guide 2-1 Figure 2-1. 9500 Models Model 9501 Model 9502 Pre-Installation Considerations It should be noted that the scope of this manual does not encompass all factors related to worker safety and checkstand design. It does, however, offer a list of considerations that may be helpful in ensuring greater safety and productivity. Careful planning using these general guidelines should result in a more efficient, comfortable work environment. The U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics reports that the incidence of repetitive motion injuries has increased dramatically in recent years. Checkstand design and scanner installation and operation procedures can reduce the risk of repetitive motion injuries, but not eliminate it. Although there are currently no formal guidelines for checkstand ergonomics, the Food Marketing Institute (FMI) and the National Institute of Occupational Safety (NIOSH) of the Department of Health and Human Services have released the reports listed at the end of these recommendations. These reports contain useful suggestions for ergonomic improvement of checkstand designs and scanner installation, maintenance and usage. Portions of the reports are summarized below. For copies of the complete reports, or to inquire about any modifications to the recommendations, contact FMI and NIOSH at the addresses listed at the end of these recommendations. 2-2 Magellan® 9500 Checkstand Design Checkstand Design 1. Select a design which allows load-sharing by several muscle groups (for example designs which allow the cashier to use both hands for scanning and bagging). 2. Select checkstands which deliver products to the cashier on an input belt and do not require the unloading of items from a cart. These designs put less stress on the cashiers’ shoulders and back. 3. Minimize the distance between the input and take-away conveyors (i.e., the distance the cashier has to reach to move the products). 4. Minimize the width of the input conveyor to reduce the cashier’s reach to items on the far side of the belt; use a diverter to direct products closer to the cashier. 5. Select a design which encourages the cashier to slide products across the scanner rather than gripping and lifting. Make sure the horizontal surface of the scanner is flush with all surrounding surfaces. 6. Choose a design which integrates the scanner and scale to eliminate extended reaches and lifts during weighing tasks. 7. Provide an easily accessible bag stand at a height 13 - 17 inches (33 43.2 cm) lower than the top surface of the checkstand to reduce stresses to the shoulders, elbows, and risks associated with lifting products into bags. 8. Do not position the bag stand between the cashier and the scanner, due to the increased reach involved. 9. Position the scanner’s horizontal scanning surface 34 - 36 inches (86.4 - 91.4 cm) above the floor. Maintain a minimum of five inches (12.7 cm) clearance between elbows and work surfaces. 10. Provide adjustable keyboard mounting (height, tilt, and horizontal reach). 11. Position the printer, cash drawer, and other checkstand devices the cashier uses within easy reach (less than 18 inches/45.7 cm). 12. Provide adequate toe space, foot rests or rails, antifatigue mats, and where feasible, an adjustable seat or stand against which the cashiers can lean. Product Reference Guide 2-3 Scanner Installation 1. Mount the horizontal surface of the scanner flush with the countertop to encourage slide scanning rather than lifting. 2. Position the centerline of the scanner read area 8 - 10 inches (20.3 25.4 cm) from the edge of the checkstand (cashier side). Scanner Maintenance 1. Keep scanner windows clean. This will improve productivity and reduce rescans. 2. Replace scanner glass when excessive scratches are evident. References Anonymous, 1992, “Ergonomic Improvement of Scanning Checkstand Designs”, Food Marketing Institute 800 Connecticut Ave. N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006 Grant, Katharyn A. et al., 1992, “Ergonomic Evaluation of Checkstand Designs in the Retail Food Industry”, National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health 4676 Columbia Parkway Cincinnati, Ohio 45226 Scanner Usage 1. Minimize handling of heavy/bulky products. Leave these items in the cart and use an alternative entry method such as key entry of short PLUs, or handheld scanning. 2. Regularly train cashiers in proper scanning methods and ergonomics principles, such as: 2-4 Magellan® 9500 Site Preparation Overview Develop a smooth fluid motion during scanning, sharing work equally between hands. Use the entire hand for grasping and lifting items. Since the scanner reads labels on all four sides plus the top and bottom, there is no need to turn a bar code toward either of the scanner windows. Develop efficient scanning motions, not necessarily faster hand movements. Simply slide the item across the scanner’s horizontal window with as little orientation motion as necessary. Leave items in an upright position; do not lift and tilt. Learn how the scanner functions and where the scanning area is located. Do not favor either the vertical or horizontal window; slide items across the scanner in their natural orientations on the checkstand as much as possible. Site Preparation Overview Consider the following factors before installing the scanner or scanner/ scale and its optional Remote Scale Display. Ventilation Requirements: The scanner operates without the use of a ventilation fan. As long as there is adequate convective air flow and no major heat producing equipment in close proximity, the unit’s housing provides adequate heat dissipation. The air temperature in the checkstand around the scanner must not exceed 104°F (40°C). Service Access Requirements: Routine operations such as ‘zeroing’ and calibration do not require removal of the scanner from the checkstand or disassembly of the product. The installer should plan service access for the AC/DC Power Supply and cables. Product Reference Guide 2-5 Recommended Power Installation: Since the typical grocery envi- ronment includes conveyor belts and electric motors, care should be taken to ensure that the scanner has a supply of “clean” power (power without excessive electrical noise). A wiring diagram shows the recommended wiring that will provide the scanner with a “clean” source of power. Refer to Figure 2-4. Counter Preparation: Since the majority of grocery checkout lanes are designed as “left-hand take away,” the counter drawings in this chapter focus on this counter design. Simply reverse the layout for a “right-hand take away” requirement. The unit scans equally well in either of these two configurations. Liquid Drainage: Should a liquid spill occur, ensure that moisture can flow through the checkstand without pooling. Leveling: Plan ahead and provide screws/bolts in the checkstand mounts and a leveling guide (board) to allow leveling of the scanner or scanner/ scale within the counter. Use a 0.375” thick board to replicate the mounting flange on the long scanner or scanner/scale, and adjust screws or bolts until the board is flush within the counter. Use a 4.0” wide board stood on its end to adjust leveling screws/bolts in rail support applications. Cable Routing: Placement of the scanner/scale should be planned to allow easy access to other components as well as optimize communication between the scanner, the POS terminal, the optional Remote Scale Display and the Sensormatic® ScanMax ProTM controller. Note that cables may drop straight down from the scanner’s connector panel, or may be conveniently routed along the unit’s side using the hardware provided. Do not route interface cables near any electrical motors or other sources of electromagnetic interference. Remote Scale Display Placement: The customer, and checker in some instances, must be able to easily view and read the Remote Scale Display. Ambient light and mounting height considerations are discussed later in this chapter. 2-6 Magellan® 9500 Ventilation and Spacing Vertical Clearance: Provision must be made to allow adequate space above the scanner bonnet for removal and replacement of the All Weighs™ Platter (the L-shaped platter). Optimal clearance permits the platter to be grasped at its top vertical edge and lifted for removal without obstruction (such as a fixed keyboard mount or any type of enclosure). Should such an enclosure be unavoidable, an alternate method of platter removal using two coins may be employed, however a minimum vertical clearance of 1.5” (3.8 cm) MUST be provided (reference Figure 2-2). Another consideration is that the scan zone must be kept free of obstructions such as enclosures, keyboard mounts, etc. Figure 2-2. Vertical Clearance DO NOT Obstruct L-Platter Removal (Keyboard Mount) DO NOT Obstruct Scan Zone Allow a minimum clearance of 1.5" (3.8cm) (Enclosure) Ventilation and Spacing The scanner/scale’s perimeter housing has been designed to provide adequate space for convective cooling and unrestricted movement of the weighing apparatus. Figure 2-3 shows the debris chutes and ventilation slots. The checkstand design must allow: • Product Reference Guide The ambient air temperature inside the checkstand adjacent to the scanner must not exceed 104°F (40°C). 2-7 • A source of air that provides adequate cooling by convective air flow. DO NOT place the scanner in a close-fitting, fully enclosed checkstand. Provide a MINIMUM of 16 square inches (103.2 square centimeters) of air intake from below the installation for sufficient convective cooling. NOTE If motors, conveyor belts, or other heat producing equipment are located near the scanner, forced air ventilation may be required. In most installations, a 30 cfm (.84 cmm) axial fan should provide sufficient air movement. If a ventilation fan is installed, one with a removable filter that may be washed or replaced is recommended. Figure 2-3. Debris Chutes & Ventilation Slots Spider Assembly (Present only in scale models) Illustration shows a Single-Antenna EAS model installed in a right-to-left position. Your installation may vary. Debris Chutes/Ventilation Slots 2-8 Magellan® 9500 Service Access Service Access The scanner and scanner/scale have been engineered to allow performance of all routine service and maintenance (such as “zeroing” and calibration) without removing the scanner from the checkstand. Additionally all cable connections made at the scanner can be connected and removed while the unit is sitting on the countertop. The installer should provide service access to all remaining cable connectors as well as the AC/DC Power Supply (if installed). Product Reference Guide 2-9 Power Installation Reference the wiring diagram in Figure 2-4 for the recommended fusing arrangement. Grounding The AC/DC Power Supply should have an AC outlet with a clean earth ground. If you are not sure how to verify the amount of electrical noise (interference) on the power line, ask a qualified electrician to measure the input line voltage. Figure 2-4. Input Power Wiring On/Off Switch AC/DC Power Supply Scanner or Scanner/Scale Checkstand Breaker Panel Neutral Line Ground On/Off Switch Neutral Line Ground Panel Ground Power Mains 2-10 Neutral Main Breaker Panel Panel Ground POS Terminal Line Ground Inductive Loads (e.g. Conveyor Belts, Motors, etc) Earth Ground Lighting Magellan® 9500 Checkstand Preparation Checkstand Preparation Reference Figure 2-5. When performing a first time installation into a new checkstand, verify before cutting that room will be allowed for cabling, the AC/DC Power Supply, and the Sensormatic® Controller Box. When making the opening, take extra care to accurately cut to the correct dimensions. Mounting may require installation of support(s), countertop routing, or other such devices. Depending upon checkstand design, you may wish to install an item diverter to direct items toward the scan window. See the instructions in this manual titled “Counter Cutout” for more details concerning the location and preparation of the opening. Figure 2-5. Installation Overview Item Diverter Cable Routing Groove EAS Service Connection POS Term inal Remo te Displa y 0.00 Aux. Port Scale Host Powe r EAS Port Connector Bulkhead AC/DC Power Supply Product Reference Guide Sensormatic® Controller Box 2-11 Liquid Spills and Moisture Select a checkstand design which allows fluids to flow through, and directs liquids away from any electronic equipment or storage areas. Counter Cutout The most important consideration when planning the counter opening for the scanner is the operator’s comfortable reaching distance. The ideal, ergonomically sound installation allows items to be directed within easy reach, and a scanning area requiring no lifting or special orientation of items. If you haven’t already read the information at the beginning of this chapter titled, Pre-Installation Considerations, please do so before continuing these instructions. The symmetrical design of the scanner permits the operator to easily pass items from one hand to the other while scanning (either from right-to-left or left-to-right). With the unique 360- scan zone, scanning is accomplished in one fluid motion. The operator simply slides the item from the conveyor belt or diverter area through the scanning area and passes the item to the other hand, which in turn bags it or places it on a take-away conveyor belt. Movement should flow naturally over the surface of the scanner. Note that the following guidelines for preparing an existing checkstand to accept a scanner, or incorporating the unit into a new checkstand design will not be accurate for all installations. Although these guidelines will suffice for most standard installations, the installer may need to make adjustments for varying counter heights and thicknesses, support design, or other checkstand limitations. Figure 2-6 shows a typical “left-hand-take-away” checkstand design. Follow these basic steps to install the unit: 1. Select a position for the scanner that offers a smooth product flow which best accommodates the reaching distance of the average operator. 2. Cut the opening in the countertop. Reference Figure 2-7 for cutout dimensions. 2-12 Magellan® 9500 Counter Cutout 3. Install the AC/DC Power Supply, the Remote Scale Display cable and the interface cable(s) observing the following: Interface cables (and display cable, if applicable) should be routed away from all highly inductive electrical devices, like motors and conveyor belts, and even away from the unit’s power cable if possible. Cables should be easy to remove in the event that replacement is required. A little planning now will save a lot of frustration later. 4. Connect and verify all system operations. The scanner should be installed so that leading and trailing edges of the All Weighs™ Platter are flush with the countertop to enhance smooth, slide-through scanning (reference the insert in Figure 2-6). Keep in mind that the debris chutes on both sides of the platter provide the necessary clearance for proper scale operation if you are installing a scanner/scale (you won’t need to provide an additional gap for that). Product Reference Guide 2-13 Figure 2-6. Typical Checkstand Design & Cutout Location Remote Display Conveyor POS Terminal & Printer Optional Item Diverter Deadplate 6.3" (16.0cm) Scanner Keyboard Cash Drawer (Below Scanner) Scan & Bag Well (Optional) Check Writing Stand (Optional) Flush — Correct Take-Away Belt Bagging Area Above Flush — Incorrect Below Flush — Incorrect 2-14 Magellan® 9500 Counter Cutout Refer to Figure 2-7 for dimensional information. Figure 2-8 and Figure 2-9 provide counter cutout details for model 850x/950x interchangeability and minimum required counter cutout (for new 950x installations) respectively. Figure 2-7. Dimensions Window 7.0" (17.78cm) 8.0" (20.32cm) 8.6" (21.84cm) 13.5" (34.29cm) 6.5" (16.51cm) 17.76" (45.11cm) 11.5" (29.21cm) SCANNER 11.1" (28.19cm) PLATTER 11.9" (30.23cm) 28.9 lb. (13.1kg) 22.2 lb. (10.1kg) Scanner/Scale Weight Scanner Weight (w/o scale) 20.0" (50.8cm) Product Reference Guide 2-15 Figure 2-8. Cutout Dimensions: Recommended for 8500/9500 Interchangeability 20.125" (51.12cm) 18.625" (47.30cm) Max. Radius = 0.25" (0.64cm) 4x Rail 0.75" (1.9cm) 11.625" (29.53cm) 3.0" ± .03" (7.62 ± .76mm) (Center Line) Rail 0.75" (1.9cm) If leveling feet are needed, use the placement shown here, represented with plus signs (+). 3.0" ± .03" (7.62 ± .76mm) 0.37" ± .030" (0.94 ± 0.07 cm) 0.37" ± .03" (0.94 ± 0.07 cm) 20.125" ±0.06" (51.2 ±0.15 cm) 0.375" ± 0.03" (.95 ±.08 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 1.5" (3.8 cm) 0.75"± .060" (1.9 ±0.15 cm) 4.0" (10.2 cm) 2-16 0.75"± .060" (1.9 ±0.15 cm) Liquid Drainage 18.625" ± .060" (47.3 ±0.15 cm) Liquid Drainage Magellan® 9500 Counter Cutout Figure 2-9. Cutout Dimensions: Minimum Required Counter Cutout 20.09 ± 0.06" (51.03 ± 0.15cm) 17.88 ± 0.06" (45.26 ± 0.015cm) Max. Radius = 0.25" (0.64cm) 4x Rail 1.22" (3.1cm) 11.562" (29.367cm) 3.0" ± .03" (7.62 ± .76mm) (Center Line) Rail 1.0" (2.54cm) If leveling feet are needed, use the placement shown here, represented with plus signs (+). 3.0" ± .03" (7.62 ± .76mm) .50" ± .030" (1.27 ±0.07 cm) 0.61" ± .03" (1.55 ±0.07 cm) 20.09" ± 0.06" (51.03 ± 0.15cm) 0.375" ± 0.03" (.95 ±.08 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 1.5" (3.8 cm) 1.18"± .060" (3.00 ± 0.15 cm) 4.0" (10.2 cm) Product Reference Guide 1.00"± .060" (2.54 ± 0.15 cm) Liquid Drainage 17.88 ± 0.06" (45.26 ± 0.015cm) Liquid Drainage 2-17 Checkstand Mounting There are a number of things to take into account when installing the unit into a checkstand. Key factors are ergonomic/worker safety, loading capacity and stability. Consider the scanner or scanner/scale’s weight when calculating the robustness of construction needed to support it as well as maximum capacity of weighed and scanned items. NOTE If you choose to rout a countertop with a thickness of 0.75” (1.9 cm) plywood, you’ll need to add a backing strip that supports the area routed out for the support flanges (see Figure 2-5). This support strip should minimally be made of 0.75” (1.9 cm) thick plywood and be approximately 4.0” (10.2 cm) wide and 14.0” (35.6 cm) long. This strip should be glued as well as screwed to the underside of the countertop. Checkstand Vibration Proper function of the scanner/scale is dependent upon an installation which minimizes excess vibration from conveyor belts, fans, and other such equipment. See Chapter 4, Scale Error Reporting, if vibration is suspected of causing operational problems. Installation Overview The preceding Site Preparation Overview dealt with installed location and counter preparations to accommodate the scanner or scanner/scale. Having completed those steps, physical installation of the scanner or scanner/ scale can begin. The following instructions apply to all models. This chapter describes: 1. Unpacking the unit. 2. Verifying operation before connecting to a POS system. 3. Routing and connecting cables. 4. Validating that your scanner communication parameters match the POS terminal’s system requirements. 5. Confirming connection to the EAS system. 6. Functional testing to verify operation when connected to the POS system. 2-18 Magellan® 9500 Installation Overview The following text describes each of these steps. Unpacking To unpack the unit: • Inspect the package for signs of damage that may have occurred during shipping. If damage is found, report it to your carrier immediately. • Lift out the accessory box containing the AC/DC Power Supply, optional Remote Scale Display and cable (if present), and the Quick Reference Guide. • Remove the Quick Reference Guide and familiarize yourself with the unit’s controls and features. Leave the guide at the checkstand when the installation is complete. • Remove the protective packing and carefully lift the unit from the carton. Be sure to save the box and all packing material. In the event of failure, the unit must be returned to the factory in its original packaging. • Carefully lift off the All Weighs™ Platter as shown in Figure 2-22 and remove the protective foam pieces securing the weigh mechanism. Set the platter back in place. For added protection during shipment, the All Weighs™ Platter is covered with a tight-fitting layer of vinyl as shown in Figure 2-10. This vinyl layer MUST BE REMOVED before placing the unit into service. NOTE Product Reference Guide 2-19 Figure 2-10. Remove Protective Vinyl Protective vinyl MUST be removed from the platter before use. • Proceed to the Operational Verification instructions below. Operational Verification Follow these steps to ensure that your unit has arrived undamaged and is fully functional before installing it in the counter and connecting it to your POS system. 1. Connect the scanner and the EAS antenna to the EAS Controller Box (see Figure 2-20 and Figure 2-21) and power-on the controller box. 2. If the unit is a scanner/scale, connect the Remote Scale Display to the proper connector on the unit’s connector panel (refer to Figure 2-14). Note that if the Remote Scale Display is not connected, a scanner power-up Selftest will sound a long, low beep, and the number “8” will appear on the 7-segment display indicating a remote display error. Power-down, connect a known-good Remote Display to the appropriate port, and restart to correct this problem. Alternatively, you can disable the Remote Display using programming bar codes (see Chapter 6, Programming for more information). 3. Connect the power cable at the scanner, then at the AC outlet. 2-20 Magellan® 9500 Installation Overview When power is applied to the unit, the normal indicator sequence is: • The scanner indicator (top-most, green LED) will be lit (dim) steadily. • The EAS indicator (bottom-most, tri-color LED) will flash ON/ OFF during power-up. Additionally, the 7-segment display will flash the number ‘9’. indicating the EAS system is being initialized. • If the Selftest detects a problem, the 7-segment display will display a number code. Refer to Chapter 4, Problem Isolation, for a description of failure codes and problem isolation procedures. Scale calibration may be necessary to obtain a zero reading on the display on rare occasions. NOTE 4. The unit should be permitted to reach thermal equilibrium before proceeding to the next steps. (Reference the topic Warm-Up Time in Chapter 1.) When the unit is moved from a cooler temperature (such as a storage area) to a warmer environment (such as a checkstand location), a period of 60 minutes must be allowed to acclimate the unit to ambient conditions. Once installed and powered up, a “power-up” warm-up period of 15 minutes must be allowed before calibrating or performing weighing operations. These two warmup periods may run concurrently. 5. Verify that the scanner or scanner/scale passes an operational test by observing the following: Product Reference Guide 2-21 Scanner: Pass UPC/EAN bar code labels in front of the scanner’s win- dows. Since the interface cable is not yet connected to the POS terminal, the scanner may be limited to reading only one or two labels (see the note that follows). The scanner indicates when each label has been successfully read by flashing the green scanner light and emitting a good read tone (beep). NOTE When not connected to the host, the scanner may be limited to reading only one or two labels. (This limitation is dependent upon the interface type.) To scan multiple labels without connecting to the host, place the unit in Scanner Diagnostic Mode by pressing the Volume/Tone Push Button for four seconds. EAS System: The way in which EAS tags are deactivated is dependent upon the way the scanner is currently programmed with regard to EAS Mode. (See “EAS Mode” on page 6-48.) To test EAS system function... 2-22 • Coupled Mode — Pass an item containing both a bar code and an active EAS tag over the scanner. Successful deactivation is indicated by the bottom-most LED flashing first red, then orange, then returning to green. The beeper will sound a good read beep. If you have enabled the manual deactivation function available for Coupled Mode (see “Manual EAS Deactivation Push Button” on page 6-53), test the function by pressing the bottom push button. A ticking sound will be heard which should cease upon deactivating an EAS tag. • Decoupled Mode — In this mode, items do not require a bar code to be scanned to arm the deactivation function. Simply pass an active EAS tag over the scanner in the same direction you would scan a bar code. The bottom-most LED will flash red to indicate deactivation. No beep is sounded to indicate deactivation in this mode. • Hybrid Mode — In Hybrid Mode, the scanner must be enabled, however EAS deactivation in this mode also takes place without needing to scan an item’s bar code. Pass an active EAS tag over the scanner in the same direction you would scan a bar code. The bottom-most LED will flash red, then orange, then return to green. The beeper may be configured to sound a high frequency beep to announce successful deactivation. Magellan® 9500 Installation Overview Scale: If the Yellow (middle, scale) LED is not lit, press the Scale Zero Push Button momentarily. If the scale is operating correctly, the yellow LED will illuminate and remain on steady, and the display will show a reading of 0.00 lb (0.000 kg for metric). If the display is blank or a is displayed, it may be necessary to calibrate -0the scale before continuing. Refer to Chapter 5, Calibration, for calibration procedures. Remote Scale Display: Check to verify that 0.00 lb (0.000 kg for met- ric) is displayed, then place an item on the weighing platter. Verify that the display shows a weight and that the yellow LED goes out. Remove the item and observe that Remote Scale Display shows 0.00 lb (0.000 kg for metric) and that the yellow LED is On. 6. Unplug the AC power cord from the outlet and disconnect the power cord and Remote Scale Display cable from the scanner’s connector panel. After you have verified that the scanner, EAS system and scale (if present) are completely functional, continue with the following procedures to complete the installation. Product Reference Guide 2-23 Diagnostic Modes Two diagnostic modes are available which allow you to initiate scanner or scale diagnostic tests, as well as verify the scanner’s ability to read bar codes. Scanner Diagnostic Mode While in Scanner Diagnostic Mode, continuous scanning of labels is allowed, permitting the user to scan an unlimited number of bar codes while troubleshooting problems. Under normal operation, the scanner stores label data, awaiting the signal which transmits it to the host. When the scanner is not connected to a host, it may read and store only up to two labels, then quit reading until power is cycled (clearing the memory). This mode of operation removes this limitation. To place the scanner in Scanner Diagnostic Mode, press the Volume/Tone Push Button for approximately four seconds. While pressing the button, the scanner will first sound three tones, wait a few seconds, then sound six rapid tones; after which you should immediately release the button. While in Scanner Diagnostic Mode, identification numbers for interface1 type, firmware and configuration will scroll continually across the scanner’s 7-segment FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) display. This is useful information for field diagnostics. See Figure 4-1 for the location of the display. For example, if the dual cable RS-232 interface (type 05) were enabled, the firmware designation was R96-1234, and the configuration was R965593, the following would be shown (slowly, with blanking between each of the items): IF-05 r96-1234 r96-5593. To exit Scanner Diagnostic Mode, cycle power to the unit or press and hold the Volume/Tone Push Button for eight seconds to reset the scanner. See the topic, Scanner and Scale Reset in Chapter 3 for more information about unit resets. 1. A listing of scanner interface identification numbers is available in Chapter 6, under the topic, Interface Type. 2-24 Magellan® 9500 Installation Overview Scale Diagnostic Mode To enter Scale Diagnostic Mode, press the Scale Zero Push Button for approximately four seconds. Six rapid tones will be sounded, indicating the unit is leaving normal operation and entering Scale Diagnostic Mode. The Remote Display will flash a ‘1’ across the display while the dignostic routine is being run. When diagnostics are completed successfully, the display will indicate that the unit has passed the diagnostic test by displaying PASS . Next, the display shows a listing of how many times the unit has been calibrated and zeroed in the form of: c XXX where x equals the number of times the scale has been calibrated. Next, the unit will display Zero XXXX where x is the number of times the scale has been zeroed. Finally, all segments will be displayed in the form of: -18.8.88 c XXX to allow visual verification of display function. If the diagnostics routine is not completed successfully, the scanner will sound a series of tones and the Remote Display will show an error code. Turn to Chapter 4, Problem Isolation for a description of error codes. Press the Scale Zero Push Button once more to reset the unit and exit Scale Diagnostic Mode. See the topic, Scanner and Scale Reset in Chapter 3 for more information about unit resets. Cables & Connections Considerations when routing the power and interface cables for the scanner and scanner/scale are: • Ensure that cables are not pinched, kinked or pierced. • Do not route interface cables in close proximity to electrical motors or other sources of electromagnetic interference. • Cables can drop directly from their connectors on the scanner, or, alternatively, can be routed along the scanner’s side to the back (see Figure 2-11). Do not plug the AC power cord into the outlet at this time. It is a good practice to always connect the power cable to the scanner first before plugging it into the AC receptacle. The procedures titled, Set-Up, provided later in this chapter will instruct you to connect the power cord at that time. Figure 2-11 illustrates the basic cable routing scheme. Product Reference Guide 2-25 Figure 2-11. Cable Routing Keyboard Alternate Cable Routing Remote Display POS Terminal, Printer & Cash Drawer Scanner AC Power Switch (recommended) AC/DC Power Supply AC Power Remote Scale Display Cable Scanner (optional Interface Scanner/Scale) Cable EAS Antenna Cable EAS Controller Box Scale Interface Cable (Scanner/Scale) Optional EAS Interface Cable 2-26 Magellan® 9500 Remote Scale Display Placement/Installation Figure 2-12 provides physical dimensions for the AC/DC Adapter (part number 8-0582). Figure 2-12. Physical Measurements: AC/DC Adapter 2.3" (5.8 cm) 3.1" (7.8 cm ) 1" 5.5 ) m c (14 Remote Scale Display Placement/Installation When installing the optional Remote Scale Display, consider both the customer’s viewing angle and the amount of daily ambient light conditions anticipated at this installation site. Figure 2-13 shows available adjustment for the display head. Lighting Considerations The display will be easily readable unless placed in direct sunlight or other very strong light sources. Light interference will not be a factor in most installations. Product Reference Guide 2-27 Viewing Angle The optimum viewing angle is directly facing the customer. To ensure that the display is easily readable for the majority of your customers, the display should be approximately 48 to 60” (122 to 152 cm) from the floor. Check with local Weights and Measures authorities regarding proper positioning of scale displays used in retail trade. NOTE Figure 2-13. Remote Scale Display 0.00 lb 40˚ 25˚ 2-28 40˚ 25˚ Magellan® 9500 Remote Scale Display Placement/Installation NOTE The connector at the Remote Scale Display end is secured with a rubber band during shipping to prevent damage to the “locking tabs” (see Figure 2-15). After routing the cable, remove this rubber band before the cable end connecting to the Remote Scale Display head. Failure to remove the band will keep the connector from latching properly when it is connected to Remote Scale Display port. Placing and Installing the Remote Scale Display (Short Pedestal Base ONLY) 1. Determine where you want to install the Remote Scale Display based on your counter design, the viewing angle and lighting considerations discussed previously. Reference Figure 2-14 for the display’s physical dimensions. 2. Use the short pedestal base template provided in Figure 2-16 to mark locations of the mounting screw and cable routing holes. The mounting screw holes are on 3 3/8” (8.57 cm) centers. Before drilling, ensure the holes in your base match with the holes indicated on the template. NOTE 3. The cable can either be routed through a 3/4” (19 mm) diameter hole directly under the mounting base or through the cutout in the back of the base (see Figure 2-15). 4. Drill the mounting screw holes using a drill bit of the appropriate diameter for your mounting screws or bolts. 5. Drill the cable routing hole using a 3/4” (19 mm) drill bit (optional). It may be necessary to shorten the stalk that supports the display head so that the display is installed at eye level. Product Reference Guide 2-29 Figure 2-14. Physical Measurements: Remote Display (Short Base) 5.8" 14.7 cm 0.00 Minimum 5.5" (14.0 cm) Maximum 11.75" (29.8 cm) lb 3.0" 7.6 cm " 95 m 0.4 c 2. 3.375" 0.953 cm 5" 1. cm 8 3. 4.5" 31.6 cm 6. Cut the stalk to fit your installation (if required). 7. Route the cable through the base/stalk so that you can plug the connector into the display head. 8. Remove the rubber band from the connector and attach the connector to the display head. 9. Slip the display head onto the stalk/base. 10. Feed the entire remaining length of the Remote Scale Display interface cable through the cable routing hole so that the assembled Remote Scale Display can be positioned over the mounting screw holes. 2-30 Magellan® 9500 Remote Scale Display Placement/Installation 11. Install mounting screws or bolts to complete the installation of the Remote Scale Display. Take care not to pinch or pierce the interface cable while securing the Remote Scale Display to the checkstand. Figure 2-15. Remote Scale Display Components Mounting Example 11.5" (29cm) 36" (91cm) Cable Connector 48 - 60" (122 - 152cm) Cable end after rubberband is removed. Display Stalk 24" (61cm) Display Head Display Base (optional cable routing) Product Reference Guide Interface Cable 2-31 Figure 2-16. Remote Scale Short Base Display Mounting Template 4 1/2" (11.4 cm) 1 1/2" (3.8 cm) 3 3/8" (8.57 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) FRONT Changing Weighing Modes Your scanner/scale has been programmed for weighing in either pounds or kilograms depending upon the initial operating environment that was specified when you ordered your scanner/scale. If you need to change from pounds to kilograms or vice-versa, call technical support. You can verify that the scale is set correctly for your country’s requirements by observing that the Remote Scale Display shows the appropriate measurement symbol (lb or kg) when the power-up Selftest is completed. LEGAL NOTE 2-32 Any time the scale weighing mode is changed, the scale must be re-calibrated before commercial use. Magellan® 9500 Set-Up & Installation Set-Up & Installation These setup and installation procedures assume that you have already prepared your checkstand to receive the scanner or scanner/scale. If you have not already made the counter cutout and routed power and interface cables, do so now as described in the previous instructions. If your checkstand has been prepared, proceed as follows: EAS Considerations When installing a system which includes EAS deactivation, issues to be considered are: • Placement of the EAS Controller Box. The controller must be located near the scanner, and be within easy connection of an adequate power supply. • The EAS Single-Antenna (installed under the scanner’s top platter) must be situated so that it is “downstream” with regard to the scanning window. That is, when items are moved either right-to-left, or left-to-right over the scan window, the EAS Antenna must be positioned AFTER the scan window for correct operation. See Figure 217. EAS Dual Antenna systems require no special positioning, since the two antennas envelope both sides of the scanner. NOTE Figure 2-17. EAS Antenna Positioning Manual EAS Deactivation Push Button Bar Code Label EAS LED (Tri-Color) Item EAS Label EAS Dual-Antenna model (no positioning required) EAS Single-Antenna Product Reference Guide 2-33 Swapping Position: EAS Single-Antenna ONLY The EAS Antenna must be located in the position needed for your installation. Reference Figure 2-18 and. Locate it as described below: 1. Remove the platter (see Figure 2-22). 2. If the unit is a model containing a scale, and the scale assembly is determined to be in the position the EAS Single-Antenna should be with regard to product flow, proceed to the next step. Otherwise, skip to step 7. 3. Remove the screws that fasten the Load Cell/Spider Assembly to the scanner (see Figure 2-18) and carefully lift the entire assembly from the scanner cavity. Retain the screws for re-installation. Figure 2-18. Locating the EAS Single-Antenna (Right-to-Left) EAS Antenna Product Flow Load Cell/Spider Assembly Load Cell Harness 2-34 Magellan® 9500 Set-Up & Installation 4. Disconnect the Load Cell harness. 5. Move the Load Cell/Spider Assembly into position on the opposite side of the scanner cavity and re-install the original screws. Torque the screws evenly to 50 in-lb. Figure 2-19. Locating the EAS Single-Antenna (Left-to-Right) Product Flow EAS Antenna Load Cell/Spider Assembly Load Cell Harness (bend for left-hand scale installation) 6. Route the Load Cell harness, re-bending it as indicated on the harness, and reconnect. 7. Orient the EAS Antenna in the position indicated by Figure 2-17, then route the antenna cable down through the unit’s side. Securely attach the antenna using the screws provided. 8. Connect the antenna cable to the EAS Controller Box. 9. Re-install the platter. LEGAL NOTE The scale must be recalibrated upon completion of this procedure, or upon completion of installation. DO NOT touch EAS Antenna coils inside of housing when in operation. Coils generate over 500 VDC when activated. WARNING This completes the EAS Single-Antenna location swapping procedure. Product Reference Guide 2-35 Set-up 1. Place the scanner on the checkstand next to the counter cutout. 2. Make all connections to peripheral devices, such as the Remote Scale Display (see Figure 2-15) and EAS Controller Box (see Figure 2-20). Power on the EAS Controller Box. Figure 2-20. EAS Controller Box Connections To EAS Antenna To Power ON/OFF Switch To Scanner 3. Route the cables up through the cutout and connect the scanner and scale interface cable(s), EAS cable and Remote Scale Display cable (optional) to the scanner. Some POS terminals require two interface cables; one for the scanner interface and one for the scale interface. Refer to Figure 2-21 for cable connection locations. If you have a scanner with no scale, there will be only one interface cable to the POS terminal. 4. Connect the power cord to the scanner and route the other end down through the checkstand to the AC power outlet. DO NOT plug the power cord in at this time. 2-36 Magellan® 9500 Set-Up & Installation Figure 2-21. Connecting Cables to the Scanner/Scale 0.00 POS Terminal POS TERMINAL Remote Display Aux. Port Scale Host REMOTE DISPLAY AUXILLIARY PORT SCALE HOST · Label Data Drives Remote Display · Test Port Scale Data (dual · On Screen · Scale Data (for cable scanner/scale) Programming (OSP) single cable interfaces) · Application Download · Application Download · RS-232 Handheld (where appropriate) Scanner Input · Auxilliary RS-232 Label Data Output Models with scale only Product Reference Guide Connection to this port is Optional Power POWER AC Brick Input OR Power off Terminal (POT) Brick Input EAS Port EAS PORT Connection to external Sensormatic® ScanMax ProTM controller box. Controls EAS deactivation system. Dual cable units only. (Scale connection may be handled through POS Terminal port) 2-37 Installation 1. Make sure that all cables are firmly attached (except that the AC/ DC power supply should not be connected to the AC outlet yet). Reference Figure 2-5, Figure 2-20, and Figure 2-21. 2. Remove the All Weighs™ Platter to gain access to the lift handles. Grasp the platter as shown in Figure 2-22 and gently lift it from the scanner. If the top edge of the platter is blocked, you may find it easier to grasp the platter vertical bezel as shown in Figure 2-22b. Figure 2-22. Removing the All Weighs™ Platter a OR b Obstruction Vertical Bezel 2-38 Magellan® 9500 Set-Up & Installation 3. Hook the fingers of both hands into the lift handles. The first is located along the inside of the front scanner wall, and the second is behind the scanner hood, as shown in Figure 2-23. DO NOT attempt to lift the unit using the EAS Antenna, plastic edges, scale frame, or any features other than the lift handles. CAUTION 4. Lower the unit into the counter opening, ensuring that none of the cables are pinched, pierced or crimped. 5. Re-install the All Weighs™ Platter and verify that it is flush or just below flush with the countertop. This is necessary to provide smooth scanning from either direction. Make adjustments as needed to align the platter with the counter by moving support rails up or down, or consider installing screws in positions that will allow their use in adjusting the unit’s position. Failure to install a scanner/scale in a stable and level position will inhibit weighing, calibration and zeroing operations. The platter MUST make unobstructed contact with all of its supports for proper weighing operation. NOTE 6. Once installation is complete, proceed with the Operational Verification procedures that follow. Product Reference Guide 2-39 Figure 2-23. Using the Lift Handles Marked "Lift Handle" 2-40 DO NOT use the EAS Antenna to lift the unit Magellan® 9500 System Power-Up Recap System Power-Up Recap The System Power-Up procedure may vary depending upon the requirements of your POS system. It is generally a good practice to power-down (switch off ) all equipment prior to connecting cables. Check with your System Supervisor and/or refer to your POS terminal manual for proper power-down and power-up procedures and interface requirements when connecting any peripheral device. If you have not identified any specific requirements for your POS system, follow these steps. 1. Power-down the POS terminal. 2. Ensure that power is disconnected from the scanner. 3. Connect the scanner and scale interface cables to your POS terminal. This connection may use one or two cables depending upon your POS terminal interface. 4. Connect the EAS interface cable. Always Apply power to the EAS Controller box before powering on the scanner. NOTE 5. Connect the Remote Display cable if your model is a scanner/scale and make any connections to optional equipment, such as a handheld scanner. Product Reference Guide 2-41 6. Power-up the scanner or scanner/scale by connecting the power cord to an AC power outlet. Wait for the unit to complete the Self test routine (10 seconds maximum). Successful scanner power-up is signified by any or all of the following: - Facet wheel shows movement - Lasers turn on - Status LED(s) turn on - Speaker sounds tone(s) - Remote display shows message - A single red dot is visible on the 7-segment display 7. Power-up the POS terminal. Verify that scanning, deactivation and weighing functions are operational and that data is properly communicated between the scanner and your POS system. (Scan, deactivate and weigh a few items.) If problems are encountered, refer to Chapter 4, Problem Isolation. 8. You have now completed installation and system integration of the scanner or scanner/scale. At this point, the scale must be calibrated and certified in accordance with the requirements of your state and/ or local requirements. Refer to Chapter 5, Calibration, for calibration procedures. 2-42 Magellan® 9500 Chapter 3 Operation and Maintenance The information contained in this chapter describes how to operate and maintain the scanner, scale and EAS system. Topics include “how to’s” on scanning, EAS tag deactivation, weighing, re-zeroing the scale, removing the top cover and cleaning the upper and lower windows. Scanning Items To scan items using the scanner, slide or push them through the scan zone as shown in Figure 3-1. The scanner will work equally well with either a left-to-right or right-to-left motion through the scan zone. There is rarely a need to reorient an item’s bar code since the scanner can “see” the left, right, front and back side, as well as the top and bottom of an item. “Limited Scanning Mode” is entered by default by interfaces such as USB and IBM until a Point Of Sale (POS) terminal enables scanning. Labels are “chirped” while in this mode. NOTE Product Reference Guide 3-1 Figure 3-1. Scan Zone Vertical Window Scan Zone Note that eyes... Horizontal Window Scan Zone ...indicate what the scanner "sees." Top Down Scan Zone Checker Side Scan Zone Proper Scanning Technique The scanner was designed to provide the ultimate in ergonomic enhancements for Point-Of-Sale (POS) scanning. To take advantage of these advancements: Practice the techniques below to improve scanning efficiency: 3-2 • Move the product across the horizontal window (See Figure 3-1). • Since the scanner reads labels on all four sides plus the top and bottom, don’t favor either the horizontal or vertical scan windows. Keep items in their natural orientation. • Remember to slide or push items rather than picking them up. By avoiding any gripping, twisting and rotation of your hands and wrists, you can prevent repetitive motion injuries. This technique also relieves you from lifting possibly thousands of pounds per day. • Develop a smooth fluid motion during scanning, sharing work equally between hands. • Use the entire hand for grasping and lifting items. • Develop efficient scanning motions, not necessarily faster hand movements. • Learn typical locations for bar codes on packages; avoid “flipping” or rotating the items during scanning. • Learn how the scanner functions and where the scanning area is located. Magellan® 9500 Deactivating Security Labels Sensormatic® Ultra-Max®, Ultra-Strip® II and III EAS (Electronic Article Surveillance) tags can be detected and deactivated by the system. This is accomplished by means of a ScanMax deactivation antenna mounted under the scanner platter (single-antenna models) or both behind the vertical window and under the scanner platter (dual-antenna models). EAS tags should be brought within five inches of the antenna(s) to be deactivated. NOTE Single-Antenna models ONLY: EAS tag deactivation is dependent upon correct installation of the EAS antenna, “downstream” with regard to the direction of scanning: Left-to-right (see Figure 2-18, or right-to-left (see Figure 2-19). If deactivation is not occurring while items are presented during a normal scan, consult your system specialist or See “Swapping Position: EAS Single-Antenna ONLY” on page 34. for assistance in optimizing the installation. EAS Deactivation Modes Three modes of initiating deactivation are selectable via scanner programming (reference Chapter 6, "EAS Mode" in this manual): • Coupled Mode — Deactivation occurs only after item bar codes are read by the scanner. • Decoupled Mode — Deactivation is independent of the scanning function • Hybrid Mode — EAS system is armed whenever the scanner is enabled and the deactivation beep is sounded when an EAS tag is deactivated.. The EAS system must be functional to implement any of the EAS Modes. If the EAS system is not active, error code 9 will be displayed in the 7-segment LED display (see Figure 4-1). NOTE Product Reference Guide 3-3 EAS Deactivation Indicators The scanner can be programmed to beep in acknowledgement of deactivation or upon deactivation failure. Additionally, the tri-color indicator (the bottom-most LED) displays deactivation status. (For more information about Beeper and LED indications, see the LED/Beeper Indications & Controls chapter of this manual. Also reference the programming chapter for their configurable features.) By general default, LED indications are: • Green means the system is ready (standing by). • Red signifies the system has detected an EAS tag. • Orange indicates an EAS tag is being deactivated. Manual EAS Deactivation Push Button The bottom-most push button is reserved for use in rare instances where EAS tagged items are not automatically deactivated when brought through the scan zone. This button is not intended for regular use. In instances where deactivation is not automatically triggered, hold the EAS tag directly downstream from the horizontal window, and press and release the Manual EAS Deactivation Push Button. This manual deactivation feature is optional, and can be enabled/disabled via the bar codes located in the programming chapter of this manual. The item will be deactivated and a message to store management that this has occurred will be sent. NOTE In a case where an item’s bar code is damaged or obscured by an EAS tag or other obstruction, the operator will need to key enter the barcode number and use the Manual EAS Deactivation Push Button to manually deactivate the EAS tag. Deactivating the EAS System when failed In cases of EAS system failure or malfunction, a scanner can be enabled to operate independent of the EAS deactivation function. This is accomplished by pressing and holding the EAS Manual Deactivation Push Button for three seconds. The scanner will sound three high-pitched beeps upon bypassing the EAS function in this manner. When in this state, the scanner’s EAS LED will flash slowly red, as well as the FRU Status LED, which will slowly flash error nine (9). 3-4 Magellan® 9500 Proper Weighing Technique 1. The L-shaped All-Weighs™ platter allows you to place items anywhere on its surface, including leaning against its vertical section, to be weighed accurately. The raised “Produce Rail” also provides a convenient way to ensure items do not rest on the counter or other non-weighing surfaces. (Reference Figure 3-2.) It is important that items rest entirely on the platter for their full weight to be accurately recorded. NOTE Figure 3-2. L-Shaped Platter & Item Placement Produce Rail 2. Once weighed items are in place, enter PLU (price Look-Up) data as described in your POS system instructions. Item weight is displayed on the Remote Display and/or the host display. 3. Remove the item from the weigh platter. Product Reference Guide 3-5 Operational Controls The function of scanner and scale controls and indicators is listed in Appendix A, LED/Beeper Indications & Controls. Turn to that appendix for full details. Operational Modes The scanner or scanner/scale features a number of modes that are important to both the user and the system support personnel. These modes can be combined into three groups: pre-operational, operational, and additional functions. The following text describes these modes, what they mean, and how and when they are seen. Power-Up/Selftest & Pre-Operation Pre-Operation describes those steps that must be successfully completed before the scanner sounds the initial good read tone and illuminates the lamps indicating the scanner and/or scale are ready for operation. These steps include Power-Up Selftest, Error Reporting, and Operational Configuration. Power-Up/Selftest Power-Up Selftest begins when power is applied. The scanner’s software immediately begins the testing sequence to verify that all systems are functioning properly. This routine, which only takes a few seconds, checks all the functions of the scanner, EAS deactivation system, scale, remote scale display and interface prior to indicating that it is ready for operation. A tone indicating Selftest is complete is a configurable feature. See the topic Power-up Beep Control in the Programming chapter of this manual. NOTE 3-6 Magellan® 9500 Operational Modes Error Reporting If a fatal error is detected during Selftest or operation, the unit will not advance to Normal Operation Mode. Selftest diagnostics will cause the unit to sound a long, low tone and/or display an error message on the 7segment display indicating where the failure occurred. These messages are coded to assist the repair technician in identifying the failed component. If the error is with the EAS deactivation system, the bottom-most LED will flash red. If an error is indicated, make note of it and contact your supervisor or technical support representative. A table containing descriptions of these error codes is included in Chapter 4, Problem Isolation. If a non-fatal1 error is detected (such as the loss of one of the two lasers, or EAS deactivation system error), the unit will sound a long, low tone and display a number on the 7-segment display. The unit will advance to Normal Operating Mode, but performance may be affected until a correction or repair is made. Operational Configuration Once Selftest diagnostics have been successfully run, a tone is emitted (if configured to do so, and the unit enters an operational configuration state. The scanner or scanner/scale will automatically load your specific interface settings which are required to communicate with the host system. There are two conditions that must be met before the unit can enter Operating Mode: • No bar code label can be in the scan volume while the unit is in this state. Progress is halted until the label has been removed, thereby ensuring that no extraneous bar code data is send to the host. • If your scanner has a scale, the scale cannot be in motion (usually caused by excessive vibration in the checkstand) for this test to succeed. A “Scale in Motion” status will be indicated by displaying a period and the applicable weight unit (lb . lb or kg . kg ) that is selected. • The scale must be able to “capture” zero weight. The -0display will be seen if there is a weight on the platter at power-up. Removing the weight or pressing the Scale Zero Push Button should allow the scale to find zero. 1. Scanner behavior under non-fatal error conditions is configurable. See Chapter 6, Programming for more details. Product Reference Guide 3-7 • When the scanner or scanner/scale completes its Selftest successfully, it emits a tone (when configured to do so) and enters Operating Mode. Operating Mode Operating Mode includes Normal Operation (scanning, EAS deactivation and weighing) and Sleep Mode. These two modes are most commonly observed by the user/operator. Normal Operation This condition is indicated by the scanner green LED and the EAS deactivation LED both being on dim and steady. For scanner/scale models, the scale yellow LED indicates that the scale senses a weight of zero on the platter. If you have a scanner without scale model, the yellow lamp will not be lit when the scanner is ready for scanning. Yellow and Green LED indications are configurable. Your scanner may not be programmed to operate in the standard manner described above. NOTE Once the scanner enters Normal Operation, it begins a countdown sequence. If there is no activity during a preset period of time (also called time-out1), the unit will shut off the laser and/or motor in order to prolong the life of the electrical and mechanical components. Once the scanner has timed out, it enters Sleep Mode. 1. “Timeout” and “Sleep Mode” time delays are programmable features that can be selected through use of the programming labels included in Chapter 6, Programming. 3-8 Magellan® 9500 Additional Functions Sleep Mode After the scanner has been left idle for a preset period of time, the laser and/or motor automatically turns off (goes to sleep). This state is called Sleep Mode, and is indicated by a “slow” blink of the green light (blinking at a 2-second rate). To wake up the unit, press anywhere on the weigh platter (scanner/scale models only), press the Volume Selection switch or wave your hand in front of the vertical window. The unit will recognize any of these signals as a wake-up call and instantly return to Normal Operation. Additional Functions Additional scanner and scale functions include programming, running scanner or scale diagnostics, initiating a reset, zeroing the scale, and calibrating the scale. Programming When your scanner or scanner/scale is shipped from the factory it is configured to work with the POS system interface at your store and read the bar code symbologies you designated. If you need to change this configuration information for any reason, Chapter 6, Programming, contains special bar code labels for changing the unit’s settings. Diagnostic Mode Refer to Chapter 2, Diagnostic Modes for details about running scanner and scale diagnostics. Turn to Chapter 4, Problem Isolation, for a description of error codes resulting from diagnostics. Scanner and Scale Reset The reset procedures and indicators are identical for scanner and scanner/ scale models. As with any electronic equipment, it is sometimes necessary to reset the electronics. The reset procedure allows you to initiate a reset command to the scanner. This may be necessary if the POS terminal has been switched off or the store system has been reset while the unit is on. Reset can also be used to initiate and run the unit’s internal Selftest routine. Product Reference Guide 3-9 Pressing and holding the Volume/Tone Push Button for approximately eight seconds initiates a reset, which is sounded by a rapid number of beeps. If the motor had been spinning, the lamps will blink while the motor spins down. At that point, the motor will spin back up and the scanner will continue to run the Selftest diagnostics. For more information, see the topic, Power-Up/Selftest & Pre-Operation earlier in this chapter. Scale Adjustments The scale allows two user adjustments: zeroing and calibration. The first, and most frequently performed, is ‘zeroing’ the scale. This operation resets the scale’s “at rest” reading to zero which must be within the range of - 0.2 pounds (- 1.25 grams) to +0.6 pounds (0.27kg) since the last calibration. While the ‘at rest’ reading remains within the zero range, the scale will automatically adjust itself to true zero. The scale also automatically zeros itself on power-up if the weight present on the scale is within these defined limits. Zeroing the Scale The zeroing operation may be performed by checkers and other store personnel. Pressing and releasing the Scale Zero Push Button should return the scale to Normal Operation. If the zero point moves out of the zero range due to debris accumulation or other causes, pressing the Scale Zero Push Button will not reset the zero point. In this case the weigh platter must be cleaned, debris chutes cleared of debris or the scale must be recalibrated. With the scanner/scale powered-up and at operating temperature: 1. Remove everything from the weighing surface of the scanner/scale. 2. Press the Scale Zero Push Button. (See Figure 1-1). 3. The Zero1 light will turn on and the display will show 0.00 lb (0.000 kg). If it does not, see Chapter 4, Problem Isolation. 4. You have completed the scale zeroing function. 1. Zero light operation is configurable. 3-10 Magellan® 9500 Additional Functions Calibrating the Scale The second adjustment, calibration, defines and sets a standard reference weight range against which all product weights are compared. If your scale is set for weighing in pounds, this range is 0 - 30 pounds, and, if your scale is set for weighing in kilograms, the range is 0 - 15 kilograms. The scale must be calibrated upon initial installation, whenever the scale cannot be zeroed, when the scale diagnostics indicate a calibration error, when the weighing measure (pounds or kilograms) is changed, or when the scale module has been replaced. Normally, once the scale has been calibrated, the calibration must be verified and/or approved by a local regulatory body. In many areas of the United States, the scale calibration switch must be sealed before being placed into service. Consult the agency responsible for regulating weighing devices in your area to ensure that you are meeting all legal and regulatory requirements. Chapter 5, Calibration, describes the calibration sequence and verification process. Calibration can only be performed if the tamper seal that secures access to the Calibration Switch is broken and the switch cover is removed. Breaking the seal may legally render the scale inoperable until it has been recertified and a new seal attached. Consult your local regulations before removing the calibration seal if you are unsure of the legal requirements. Although the scale will physically continue to weigh products, a broken seal may require recertification by a proper authority as designated by your local laws. Product Reference Guide 3-11 Operational Maintenance The scanner or scanner/scale will provide dependable service for many years. The following maintenance procedures will keep your scanner or scanner/scale operating at peak performance. Cleaning the Weigh Platter and Scan Windows. Clean the exterior surfaces of the horizontal and vertical scan windows at least twice daily with a nonabrasive, mild, water-based glass cleaner and paper towels or lint-free cleaning tissues. The textured plastic surfaces and stainless steel can also be cleaned using the same cleaning agents. Cleaning the Air Gap/Debris Chutes & Drip Rail. Daily, clear the debris chutes between the platter and the outer housing. Most items can be cleared from the debris chutes by carefully running a thin stiff object like a credit card along all sides of the weighing surface. If necessary, remove the top cover to clear the debris chutes and drip rail. 3-12 Magellan® 9500 Operational Maintenance Vertical Scan Window Replacement The Vertical Scan Window enclosed in the All Weighs™ Platter is a replaceable part. Follow these instructions to remove and replace the window: To remove the Vertical Scan Window: 1. Grasp the platter as shown in Figure 3-3 and gently lift it from the scanner. Figure 3-3. Platter Removal a OR b Obstruction Vertical Bezel 2. If the top edge of the platter is blocked, you may find it easier to grasp the platter vertical bezel as shown in Figure 3-3b. NOTE Use caution to avoid damage to the now exposed horizontal and vertical scan windows. If cleaning of these windows is necessary, use a nonabrasive, mild, water-based glass cleaner and paper towels or lint-free cleaning tissues and take care to avoid scratching these windows (damage to the windows can degrade scanning performance). Product Reference Guide 3-13 3. The vertical scan window is held in place by two tabs each on its top and bottom edges. To remove it, carefully push out on the top as shown in Figure 3-4 and lift it out. Carefully dispose of any damaged glass. Figure 3-4. Vertical Scan Window Removal/Replacement Vertical Scan Window 4. Fully seat the new vertical scan window into the window channel within its bottom retention tabs. Tilt the window in to engage the two tabs at the top of the retainer and carefully snap the window to secure it in place. 5. Clean both sides of the new vertical scan window using a paper towel or lint free cleaning tissues dampened with a mild, waterbased glass cleaner. DO NOT use abrasive cleaners or pads. 6. Re-install the platter. Vertical scan window replacement is now complete. 3-14 Magellan® 9500 Operational Maintenance Horizontal Scan Window Replacement (WRG) Wear Resistant Glass (WRG) horizontal scan windows are replaceable and can be removed and replaced following the instructions below. Sapphire glass does not require replacement, so it is permanently fastened in place. Do not attempt to remove Sapphire glass from the platter. NOTE 1. Remove the All Weighs™ Platter from the scanner as shown in Figure 3-3. 2. Turn the platter upside down on a clean, dry surface and remove the four screws shown in Figure 3-5. Retain all screws for later reinstallation. 3. Once the vertical bezel is freed from the platter, the WRG window can be slid from its channel as shown. Carefully dispose of any damaged glass. 4. Slide a new WRG window fully into the channel. 5. Re-install the vertical bezel using the original four screws. 6. Clean both sides of the new WRG window using a paper towel or lint free cleaning tissues dampened with a mild, water-based glass cleaner. DO NOT use abrasive cleaners or pads. 7. Re-install the platter. WRG window replacement is now complete. Product Reference Guide 3-15 Figure 3-5. Removing/Replacing the WRG Window Slide WRG Window Out 3-16 Remove Vertical Bezel Magellan® 9500 Chapter 4 Problem Isolation In the event of a suspected functional problem, use the troubleshooting references provided in this chapter. This useful information will help you to identify and resolve the cause of the problem. The scanner/scale has a number of features that indicate when a scanner, EAS deactivation system, or scale problem occurs. The unit may: • emit a series of tones • light the 7-segment (FRU status) display • flash one or more LEDs • display error codes on the Remote Display (if installed) Three error reporting modes are used: Power-Up Selftest, Operational tests and Diagnostic tests. These test sequences are explained on the following pages. Power-Up Selftest The Power-up Selftest is a pre-operational series of tests that must be successfully completed before the scanner indicates readiness for operation. This pre-operational period is the time between power-up and normal operation during which the motor comes up-to-speed and software, firmware and hardware are being tested. These tests ensure that all subsystems are fully functional before turning on the Visible Laser Diode (VLD). Refer to the Chapter 3 subsection titled, Operational Modes for a more detailed description of this and other scanner and scale modes. Product Reference Guide 4-1 Operational Tests These are the tests that run continually during Normal Operation and Sleep Mode. Firmware checks all subsystems, accessory connections and the POS interface to verify everything is operating normally. If a problem is detected at any time, a long, low tone is sounded, an error code is shown on the 7-segment display, and operation may be halted. If you press the Volume/Tone Push Button at that time, a series of tones will be sounded that matches the error code displayed. Diagnostic Tests See Chapter 2, Diagnostic Modes, for details about running diagnostic tests for the scanner and/or scale. If a problem is discovered during diagnostics, the scanner will provide feedback about the source of the problem. The remainder of this chapter describes these failure indications and includes troubleshooting flowcharts to help isolate the problem. Diagnostic Procedures Your Point-Of-Sale (POS) system may contain many components that operate as a system. Since almost all scanner or scale problems are caused by either the scanner, scale, POS terminal or communication links between them, these troubleshooting flowcharts focus on these components. Additionally, the optional Remote Scale Display, AC/DC Power Supply and their cables are potential problems addressed in this chapter. The flowcharts provided in this chapter walk you through a diagnostic process that will isolate the failed component and instruct as to the corrective action required. Since internal scanner and scale components cannot be replaced by an operator or installer, most functional errors will require the assistance of a trained technical support person. However, if the problem is caused by faulty cable, power supply or remote display, you can fix the problem by replacing the defective component and complete the installation. 4-2 Magellan® 9500 Error Codes Error Codes If an error is detected, the scanner will sound a long low tone (for one second) and alternately flash its LEDs, indicating a failure. Following the long low tone, an error code will appear on the 7-segment display (refer to Figure 4-1). Pressing the Volume/Tone Push button will cause the scanner to sound a series of beeps corresponding to that error code. The table on the following page describes what these codes mean and what action should be taken for each. When troubleshooting, always remember to check all cable connections first before proceeding with other problem isolation steps. NOTE Product Reference Guide 4-3 Error Code Probable Cause Corrective Action Configuration No POS interface has been selected (Null interface). See the topic, Interface Type, in Chapter 6 to select the required interface using programming bar codes. 1 Configuration Error See Chapter 6, Programming, for details about configuring the scanner using programming bar codes. 2 Interface Board Unplug unit and call technical support personnel. 3 Motor Unplug unit and call technical support personnel. 4 Horizontal Lasera Call technical support personnel. 5 Vertical Lasera Call technical support personnel. 6 Digital Board Unplug unit and call technical support personnel. 7 Scale See the topic Scale Error Reporting in this chapter for problem identification and corrective actions. 8 Remote Display Connect the Remote Display. If necessary, replace display or cable. Alternatively, you can disable the Remote Display using the programming procedures described in Chapter 6. 9 EAS Error No EAS communication. Check EAS cable connections. Call technical support personnel. A Button Module Call technical support personnel. C Scale Calibration Proceed to scale calibration procedure. 3.3 V Present If not lit, call technical support personnel 0 Blinking Decimal Point a. If only one laser is non-functional, the scanner may continue to work (this is a configurable feature); however, the 7-segment display will show the error code indicating the failed laser. If both lasers have failed, the 7-segment display will display either a 4 or a 5, and the scanner will cease to function until serviced. No alternate blinking of lamps will occur if only one laser has failed. 4-4 Magellan® 9500 Scale Error Reporting Figure 4-1. 7-Segment LED Display 7-Segment Display Scale Error Reporting Scale diagnostics uses the Remote Scale Display and the Zero Status lamp to communicate specific scale failures. The following chart shows the Remote Display messages, the Scale Status lamp indication, the problem that the scale is experiencing and what action should be taken. When troubleshooting, always remember to check all cable connections first before proceeding with other problem isolation steps. Remote Display Scale Status Lamp Problem Description Action Required E _1 Flash, pause, 1 blink, long pause, repeat sequence. Too much motion at powerup. Check for stable installation. Change scale motion filter using the labels found in Chapter 6; restart. If problem persists, scale may require calibration. E__2 Flash, pause, 2 blinks, long pause, repeat sequence. Calibration lost. Call technical support personnel. Recalibrate; restart; recertify (if required). Product Reference Guide 4-5 Remote Display Scale Status Lamp Problem Description Action Required E__3 Flash, pause, 3 blinks, long pause, repeat sequence. Scale communication lost. Internal scanner/scale problem. Call technical support personnel; report error. E__4 Flash, pause, 4 blinks, long pause, repeat sequence. Scale module failure. Call technical support personnel; report error. E__5 Flash, pause, 5 blinks, long pause, repeat sequence. Internal software fault. Call technical support personnel; report error. Other Scale Reporting -0- Cannot zero at power- up or weight remains on scale for more than 4 minutes or weight has not returned to zero between POS weight requestsa. Off - Check debris chutes. - Verify that the weigh platter moves freely. - Remove item(s) from scale - Press Scale Zero Push Button - for more information. - If the scale still fails to zero, recalibrate the scale. a. This is a configurable feature. Flowcharts The problem isolation flowcharts on the following pages allow you to identify and troubleshoot problems with your system. 4-6 Magellan® 9500 Flowcharts Figure 4-2. Problem Isolation: Start For units using an AC/DC adapter, verify that... 1. AC power cord is connected to a functional AC outlet. 2. IEC connectors are firmly connected. 3. DC power cord is firmly connected to scanner. If your unit is a model which receives Power Off the Terminal POT), verify that the I/F cable is securely connected at both ends. START Power-up Scanner power-up is signified by any or all of the following: - Facet wheel shows movement - Lasers turn on - Status LED(s) turn on - Speaker sounds tone(s) - Remote display shows message - A single red dot is visible on the 7segment display NO Flashing Green LED If the Green LED is flashing slowly, the scanner is most likely in Sleep Mode. Press and release the Volume/Tone Push Button or wave your hand in front of the vertical window to "wake-up" the scanner. A flashing Green LED can also mean the scanner has been disabled by the POS terminal. To exit this mode, cycle power or have the terminal re-enable the scanner. Does the scanner power-up ? Selftest Failure If the scanner fails its Selftest, the following takes place: - Speaker sounds a tone at the lowest value for approx. 3 seconds. - Green and Yellow LEDs flash on and off alternately. - 7-segment display shows a code (1 to C) to indicate the failure. YES Consult the Selftest flowchart if you're unsure the unit has passed Selftest. Magellan Power Supply Have you checked the power connections ? NO YES Check these potential problems: - AC power cord - AC/DC adaptor - AC outlet YES Is the Green LED Lit ? Does the scanner pass Selftest ? NO Ensure the Green LED is enabled via programming bar codes. Is the Green LED Lit ? NO YES NO Call Tech Support Go to Selftest flowchart YES Will the scanner read bar codes reliably ? NO YES Go to Poor/No Reading flowchart Product Reference Guide Does the YES EAS Antenna deactivate tags ? NO Go to EAS System flowchart Does the scale weigh correctly ? YES Other Problems? Call Tech Support NO Go to Scale flowchart 4-7 Figure 4-3. Problem Isolation: Selftest SELFTEST START Does the 7-segment display show 0 ? Does the 7-segment display show 1. ? NO Section 6 to enable the default configuration file. Restart the unit. NO YES No interface selected (Null Interface). Select an interface. Go to EAS System flowchart Does the 7-segment display show 9. ? Scan the Factory YES Defaults bar code in NO Does the 7-segment display show 2. or 3. ? NO YES Does the 7-segment display show 4. or 5. ? NO YES Does the 7-segment display show 7 or A. ? NO YES Does the 7-segment display show 8. ? YES Does the 7-segment display show 1. ? NO YES Call Tech Support Error code 4. indicates a failed horizontal VLDM (laser) assembly, while 5. indicates a failed vertical VLDM. If configured to do so1, the scanner will remain operational with only one of these lasers until the unit can be serviced. If both lasers have failed, the unit will no longer function. Call Tech Support Go to Remote Display flowchart For this error, the Remote Display may also show -0- or an error (E__#). Does the 7-segment display show C. ? YES Go to Scale flowchart NO 1 Unit passes Selftest 4-8 Refer to the feature Laser Failure Mode in Section 6. Magellan® 9500 Flowcharts Figure 4-4. Problem Isolation: Poor/No Reading Have you verified that all scan windows are clean and scratch-free? POOR/NO READING START Enter Scanner Diagnostic Mode by holding the Volume/Tone Push Button for 4 seconds (until first 3, and then 6 rapid tones are sounded) then release. Scan a known-good bar code. A good read is signified by one flash of the Green LED and a single beep1. Does the scanner read the bar code satisfactorily ? NO Before proceeding, verify that bar code samples presented to scanner are of good quality and a symbology the scanner can read. Call Tech Support YES Reset the scanner by holding down the Volume/Tone Push Button for 8 seconds. If unexpected data is being sent from the host to the scanner, consider enabling the programmable feature Ignore Host Commands to debug the system. Does the scanner pass the data to the POS ? NO Go to No Transmit to POS flowchart YES Does the scanner read satisfactorily ? YES DONE NO Verify programmable parameters using the information and programming bar codes provided in Section 6. Check bar code symbology options and other configurable features. Does the scanner read satisfactorily ? YES DONE NO Troubleshoot the host or call Tech Support. 1 Green and Yellow LEDs and beeper indications are configurable features. Behavior may vary from that described here. Product Reference Guide 4-9 Figure 4-5. Problem Isolation: No Transmit to POS NO TRANSMIT TO POS START Check the interface (I/F) cable connections. If possible, retest the system using a knowngood I/F cable. Does the scanner pass the data to the POS ? YES NO Verify programmable parameters using the information and programming bar codes provided in Section 6. Check interface and I/F options, inactive symbologies and other configurable features. Does the scanner read satisfactorily ? YES DONE NO Troubleshoot the host or call Tech Support. DONE 4-10 Magellan® 9500 Flowcharts Figure 4-6. Problem Isolation: Scale If this is a new installation, make sure any foam packing pieces have been removed from the scale cavity before proceeding. Lift off the platter to verify, then set the platter back into position. SCALE START View the Remote Display and/or the Yellow scale status LED for the scale error code. Reference the topic, Scale Error Reporting in Section 4 for more information. YES DONE YES -0shown on YES - Check for debris under platter. - Verify that the weigh platter RemoteDisplay/ moves freely. Yellow - Remove item(s) from scale. LED off - Press Scale Zero Button ? - If the scale still fails to zero, NO recalibrate the scale. E__1 shown on Remote Display/ YES Yellow LED Flash once ? NO Call Tech Support Problem is too much motion at power-up. Correct excess vibration in counter if possible. Is problem fixed ? NO Is the motion filter at its maximum setting ? NO Increase the scale motion filter setting by 1. Reference Section 6 for more information. NO Is problem fixed ? YES DONE NO E__2 Problem is calibration shown on Remote Display/ YES lost. Recalibrate the scale using the procedures in Yellow LED Section 5. Flash twice ? For this error, the 7-segment NO Will the scale calibrate ? YES E__3 shown on YES RemoteDisplay/ Yellow LED Flash 3 times ? NO Is problem fixed ? YES DONE display may also show a 'C'. Problem is scale communication lost. Verify cable connections to/from the scale. E__4 shown on Remote Display/Yellow LED Flash 4 times. Problem is Scale Load Cell failure. Product Reference Guide DONE NO Call Tech Support 4-11 Figure 4-7. Problem Isolation: Remote Display REMOTE DISPLAY START Is the unit configured for a Remote Display ? NO Scanner-scale models that include a Remote Display when shipped from the factory, are configured for use with the display. If you're unsure of the settings for your unit, contact Tech Support. Use the programming bar codes in Section 6 to enable operation using a Remote Display. YES Verify that the Remote Display cable is securely attached to the external Remote Display port and reset the scanner. Is the problem fixed ? YES DONE 4-12 NO NO Is the problem fixed ? Re-connect using a known-good Remote Display. Reset the scanner and retest. YES DONE Is the problem fixed ? YES Replace the Remote Display NO Call Tech Support Magellan® 9500 Flowcharts Figure 4-8. Problem Isolation: EAS System Before proceeding, verify the EAS Antenna(s) and EAS Control Box have been correctly installed (ref. Chapter 2). Ensure operator has been trained in proper EAS system use (ref. Chapter 3). NO EAS DEACTIVATION START Check all EAS cable connections. Verify programmable parameters using the information and programming bar codes provided in Section 6. Check EAS options, and other configurable features. Do the NO EAS Antenna(s) deactivate labels ? YES DONE Do the NO EAS Antenna(s) deactivate labels ? YES DONE If possible, retest the system substituting knowngood EAS cable and/or controller box and/or antenna (single-antenna models ONLY). YES Do the EAS Antenna(s) deactivate labels ? NO Call Tech Support. Product Reference Guide 4-13 NOTES 4-14 Magellan® 9500 Chapter 5 Calibration A number of situations require the scale to be calibrated. They are: • at initial installation of the scanner/scale • if the scale cannot be re-zeroed • if you change the weight measure from pounds to kilograms or viceversa • if diagnostics indicate a calibration error • the weigh module has been replaced Follow the procedures on the following pages to ensure that the scanner/ scale will meet Weights and Measurement requirements. LEGAL NOTE Certification of the scanner/scale’s weighing apparatus is subject to Federal, State and Local Weights and Measures statutes and is restricted to authorized government agencies and/or duly registered agents thereof. Anytime a scale is calibrated, it should be properly sealed with a lead and wire or paper seal before being placed into service. It is your responsibility to check with the appropriate authorities in your area to ensure compliance with pertinent regulations before removing any official seals or placing a newly calibrated scanner/scale into service. Product Reference Guide 5-1 Description of Calibration Sequence The Calibration Sequence sets the scale to an accurate reference point for weighing. This process involves the use of a Field Standard Weight Set (31.5-pounds) for calibration in pounds, (18.5-kilograms) for Metric. Once calibration has been successfully completed, the scanner/scale uses the certified weight as a reference for subsequent weighing activities. These verification procedures follow the U.S. National Institute of Standards and Technology 44 Handbook guidelines for bench/counter scale installations. If any of these tests fail to meet the required weight indications, you must calibrate the scanner/scale. Refer to the calibration procedures in this chapter for the proper procedures. You may be required by state and/or local regulations to have procedures other than these performed by a certified technician or verification official. Access to the calibration switch should be restricted with a paper or a wire and lead seal after the calibration has been performed if required by your local regulatory agency. The Calibration Sequence must be performed without removing the scanner/ scale from its installed position. NOTE The following tools and supplies will be required to perform the calibration process: • 31.5 pound Field Standard Weight Set1. (English calibration only). • 18.5 kilogram Field Standard Weight Set2. (Metric calibration only). • Lead/Wire or Paper Seal (as required by law). 1. NOTE: Throughout the calibration procedures, specified weights may be achieved by using a combination of weights from this set. eg. 20 lbs may be made up of one 10.00 lb. weight and two 5.00 lb. weights. 2. NOTE: Throughout the calibration procedures, specific weights may be achieved by using a combination of weights from this set. eg. 10 kgs. may be made up of one 5.00 kg. and five 1.00 kg. weights. 5-2 Magellan® 9500 Motion Test Motion Test This test verifies that the scale will not ‘zero’ when the weighing surface of the scanner/scale is in motion. 1. Verify that the Yellow LED1 is on and the Remote Display reads 0.00 pounds or 0.000 kilograms. 2. Press lightly on the weigh platter of the scanner/scale with one hand and at the same time press and release the Zero Push Button on the operator’s panel. The Yellow LED should turn Off and the Remote Display should not display 0.00 pounds or 0.000 kilograms. 3. Remove your hand from the weighing platform and verify that the Yellow LED is On and the Remote Display reads 0.00 pounds or 0.000 kilograms. Automatic Zero Setting Test This test verifies that the scanner/scale automatic zero setting mechanism is operating correctly. 1. Place 0.007 pounds (4 grams for metric) on the center of the weighing platform. The entire weight must be placed on the weighing platform at once for this test to be valid. The Yellow LED should go Off and the Remote Display should read 0.01 pounds (0.005 kilograms). NOTE The scanner/scale has an adaptive zero capture mechanism that re-zeros the scale over time if there is a slow change in the zero level; thus if all the weight is not placed on the weighing surface at one time, the Yellow LED will remain On and the Remote Display will read 0.00 pounds (0.000 kilograms). When the weight is removed, the Yellow LED will turn off and the display will show a minus sign . lb . Press the Zero Push Button to re-zero the scale. 1. Yellow LED indications can be configured via feature programming and may not be enabled for certain functions. Product Reference Guide 5-3 Preparing the Scanner/Scale for Calibration 1. Assure that the scanner/scale is stable, secure and properly installed. (Refer to Chapter 2, Site Preparation and Installation for instructions on the proper installation of the scanner/scale). 2. Power-up the scanner/scale. 3. Allow the unit to reach temperature equilibrium for at least one hour. If the scanner/scale is already at room temperature, allow at least 15 minutes for acclimatization. 4. Before performing the calibration, the scanner/scale must be prestressed with a weight of more than 30 pounds (15kg). With power turned on, place the entire weight set (including the case) on the weighing surface of the scale. The display should show an underscore and three hyphens , which is the overweight indication. 5. Remove all weight from the weighing surface and ensure that there are no obstructions in the debris chutes of the scanner/scale. See Figure 2-3. Calibrating the Scale (Pounds & Kilograms) 1. Before proceeding, ensure that the scanner/scale has been prepared for this process by performing the preceding steps titled, Preparing the Scanner/Scale for Calibration. 2. Remove the weigh platter and make sure that there are no obstructions in the debris chutes. 3. Cut and remove the seal that secures the calibration switch access cover and retate the cover down as shown in Figure 5-1. The seal may not be present if this is the initial installation of the scanner/ scale. 5-4 Magellan® 9500 Calibrating the Scale (Pounds & Kilograms) Figure 5-1. Calibration Access Cover Calibration Cover Calibration Switch 4. Press and release the Calibration Switch to place the scanner/scale in Calibration Mode. The scanner/scale will sound a tone indicating it is in Calibration Mode. If the motor was spinning when you initiated Calibration Mode, the motor will stop and the Yellow LED will begin flashing indicating the scale is in Calibration Mode. The display will show the message “ESCL” (empty scale). 5. Reinstall the weigh platter. 6. Press the Zero Push Button. The Yellow LED will go out for approximately 10 seconds (or less) and the Remote Display will alternately display and until the scale is ready to proceed. 7. When the scale is ready, the Yellow LED will begin blinking again and the display will show the message “Ad20 (add twenty pounds)” or “Ad10 (add ten kilograms).” The scanner/scale will also sound one tone if the scale is weighing in kilograms or two tones for pounds. Place the correct weight (twenty pounds for calibration in pounds, or ten kilograms for metric calibration) from the Field Standard Weight set on the center of the weighing area and press the Zero Push Button again. Product Reference Guide 5-5 8. The Yellow LED will extinguish for approximately 10 seconds and the Remote Display will alternately display and until the scale is ready to proceed. 9. If the calibration was successful, the speaker sounds a single tone, the Scale Status LED begins blinking again, and “End-” appears in the Remote Display. 10. If the calibration was not successful, the speaker will sound five tones indicating a scale failure, and the Scale Status LED will blink twice, strobe (fast blinks) and then continually repeat this sequence until reset. Remove all weight from the Weigh Platter, and repeat the procedure starting with step 7. 11. Press the Zero Push Button again to permanently store the calibration data and exit Calibration Mode. You have completed the calibration of the scanner/scale. The unit’s calibration must now be verified as required by state and/or local weights and measures regulations. The verification procedure must be performed to assure that a scale will pass Weights and Measures requirements before it is placed into commercial/retail service. You have completed the scale calibration procedure. You must now continue with the calibration verification tests to complete the scale’s calibration. If you are weighing in pounds, continue with the following procedures to verify that the scale was successfully calibrated and that it weighs properly. If you are weighing in kilograms, turn to the instructions titled, Calibration Verification (Kilograms), later in this chapter. 5-6 Magellan® 9500 Calibration Verification (U.S. Pounds) Calibration Verification (U.S. Pounds) Once you have completed the calibration sequence, you may be required to perform these step-by-step verification procedures. These procedures follow the National Institute of Standards and Technology Handbook-44 guidelines for grocery scale installations. You may be required by state or local law to have these procedures performed by a certified technician or verified by a proper official. These calibration verification procedures cover five different tests: • Increasing-Load Test • Shift Test • Blanking Test • Decreasing-Load Test • Return to Zero Test Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1) This test checks Scale operation with five, ten and fifteen pound weights. 1. Check that the display reads 0.00 lb. when at rest with nothing on the weighing surface. (The Yellow LED is steadily lit). 2. Place a five-pound weight on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 5.00 lb. 3. Place an additional five pounds on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 9.99 and 10.01 lb. 4. Place an additional five pounds on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 14.99 and 15.01. Remove the weights and verify that the display reads 0.00. 5. You have completed the Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1). Product Reference Guide 5-7 Shift Test The Shift Test checks to ensure that items placed anywhere on the weighing surface of the scanner/scale are weighed properly. Refer to Figure 5-2 when performing this test. 1. Place and remove in succession, a fifteen-pound load on the center of each of the four quadrants (A, B, C, and D in Figure 5-2) of the scanner/scale’s weigh platter. Verify that a reading of between 14.99 and 15.01 lb registers under load and that the display returns to 0.00 between each load. 2. After verifying the accuracy of each quadrant of the weighing surface, remove all weight from the scale. You have completed the Shift Test. Figure 5-2. Shift Test B A B A 5-8 C C D D Magellan® 9500 Calibration Verification (U.S. Pounds) Increasing- Load Test (Phase 2) After completing the Shift Test, you must complete the Increasing Load Test using 20.0, 25.0 and 30.0 pounds of weight. NOTE The upper limit of the scale is configurable according to POS interface type and may not necessarily be set at 30 pounds, which is the standard setting. For this test, continue to place weights in five pound increments only up to the upper weight limit set for your scale. 1. With the scale starting at zero, place 20.0 pounds in the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 19.99 and 20.01 lb. 2. Place an additional five pounds in the center of the weighing surface, increasing the load to 25.0 pounds and check that the display reads between 24.99 and 25.01 lb. 3. Place an additional five pounds in the center of the weighing surface increasing the load to 30.0 pounds and check that the display reads between 29.99 and 30.01 lb. 4. Remove the weights and verify that the display reads 0.00. Blanking Test This test ensures that the scanner/scale will indicate its weighing capability has been exceeded if a weight greater than 0.05 pounds over its maximum upper weight limit is placed upon the unit. 1. Place weights that total the upper weight limit plus 0.51 pounds on the scale. For example: If the upper limit is set at 30 pounds, place weights equaling 30.051 pounds. 2. Verify that the display shows a dash and three hyphens (_ - - -). This is the overweight indication. The scanner/scale may blank (show an underscore and three hyphens) at any weight greater than its upper limit, but must blank when the upper limit plus 0.051 pounds are set upon the weighing surface. NOTE Product Reference Guide 5-9 Decreasing-Load Test This test ensures that the scanner/scale responds properly when a heavy object is followed by a significantly smaller object. 1. Place a 30.0-pound load on the scale and verify that the display shows between 29.99 and 30.01 pounds. If the upper weight limit for your scale is not set at 30 pounds, begin by placing weight equaling your upper limit setting. NOTE 2. Remove weights to leave 20 pounds on the scale. Check that the display shows between 19.99 and 20.01. 3. Remove another 15.0 pounds from the scale and check that the scale reads 5.00 lb. 4. You have completed the Decreasing Load Test. Return to Zero Test This test ensures that, after all other tests have been completed successfully, the scanner/scale returns to zero. Remove all weights from the scale and verify that the scale reads 0.00 lb. After completing this test, close the calibration access cover and seal per local Weights and Measures requirements. This final step must agree with the legal requirements of your state or local government. You have completed the calibration and verification process for weighing in pounds. If the scanner/scale passes all these tests, 1. Remove the weigh platter, install the calibration switch cover and install a seal (if required). 2. Reinstall the weigh platter. If the scanner/scale fails any of these tests, it should be serviced by a qualified technician. 5-10 Magellan® 9500 Calibration Verification (Kilograms) Calibration Verification (Kilograms) Once you have completed the calibration sequence, you may be required to perform these step-by-step verification procedures. These procedures follow the National Institute of Standards and Technology Handbook-44 guidelines for grocery scale installations. You may be required by state or local law to have these procedures performed by a certified technician or verified by a proper official. These calibration verification procedures cover five different tests: • Increasing-Load Test • Shift Test • Blanking Test • Decreasing-Load Test • Return to Zero Test Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1) This test checks Scale operation for increasing loads from 0.100 kg and 7.50 kg. 1. Check that the display reads 0.000 kg when at rest with nothing on the weighing surface. (The Yellow LED is steadily lit). 2. Place a 100 gram weight on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0.100 kg. 3. Place an additional 200 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0.300 kg. 4. Place an additional 200 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0.500 kg. 5. Place an additional 100 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0.600 kg. 6. Place an additional 100 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0.700 kg. 7. Place an additional 100 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0.800 kg. Product Reference Guide 5-11 8. Place an additional 200 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 1.000 kg. 9. Increase the weight on the scale to 7.50 kg on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 7.495 and 7.505 kg. 10. Remove the weights and verify that the display reads 0.000 kg. You have completed the Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1). Shift Test (Metric) The Shift Test checks to ensure that items placed anywhere on the weighing surface of the scanner/scale are weighed properly. Refer to Figure 5-3 when performing this test. 1. Place and remove in succession, a 5.0 kilogram load on the center of each of the four quadrants (A, B, C, and D in Figure 5-3) and in the center of the scanner/scale’s weighing platform. Verify that the display shows a reading of between 4.995 and 5.005 kg for each quadrant/center test and that the display returns to 0.000 between each load. 2. After verifying the accuracy of each quadrant and the center of the weighing surface, remove all weight from the scale. You have completed the Shift Test. 5-12 Magellan® 9500 Calibration Verification (Kilograms) Figure 5-3. European Shift Test (Metric) A B CENTER A C B TER CEN C D D Increasing- Load Test (Phase 2) After completing the Shift Test, you must complete the Increasing Load Test using 10.00, 12.50 and 15 kilograms of weight. NOTE The upper limit of the scale is configurable according to POS interface type and may not necessarily be set at 15 kilograms, which is the standard setting. For this test, continue to place weights in 2.50 kilgram increments only up to the upper weight limit set for your scale. 1. Place 10.00 kilograms in the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 9.990 kg and 10.010 kg. 2. Place an additional 2.50 kilograms in the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 12.490 kg and 12.510 kg. 3. Place an additional 2.50 kilograms in the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 14.990 kg and 15.010 kg. 4. Remove the weights and verify that the display reads 0.000 kg. 5. You have completed phase two of the increasing load test. Product Reference Guide 5-13 Blanking Test This test ensures that the scanner/scale will indicate its weighing capability has been exceeded if a weight greater than 0.82 over its maximum upper weight limit is placed upon the unit. 1. Place weights that total the upper limit plus 0.82 kilograms on the weigh platter. For example: If the upper limit is set at 15 kilograms, place weights equaling 15.82 kilograms. 2. Verify that the display shows a dash and three hyphens ( _ - - -). This is the overweight indication. The scanner/scale may blank (show an underscore and three hyphens) at any weight greater than its upper limit, but must blank when the upper limit plus 0.82 pounds are set upon the weighing surface. NOTE 5-14 Magellan® 9500 Calibration Verification (Kilograms) Decreasing-Load Test This test ensures that the scanner/scale responds properly when a heavy object is followed by a significantly smaller object. 1. Place weights that total 15.8 kilograms. If the upper weight limit for your scale is not set at 15 kilograms, begin by placing weight equaling your upper limit setting plus 0.8 kilograms. NOTE 2. Remove weights to leave 10 kilograms on the scale and verify that the display shows between 9.990 and 10.010 kilograms. 3. Remove an additional 9.00 kilograms from the scale and check that the scale reads 1.000 kg. 4. You have completed the Decreasing Load Test. Return to Zero Test This test ensures that, after all other tests have been completed successfully, the scanner/scale returns to zero. Without any weight on the weigh platter, verify that the scale reads 0.000 kg. You have completed the calibration and verification process for weighing in kilograms. If the scanner/scale passes all these tests, 1. Remove the weigh platter, install the calibration switch cover and install a seal (if required). 2. Reinstall the weigh platter. If the scanner/scale fails any of these tests, it should be serviced by a qualified technician. Product Reference Guide 5-15 NOTES 5-16 Magellan® 9500 Chapter 6 Programming Introduction to Label Programming The programming bar code labels contained in this manual will allow you to customize and configure features and settings for your scanner (scanner/scale). To ensure full compatibility and proper function, use only the programming bar codes in this manual and other product-specific publications to program scanner features. This manual has been developed to make it quick and easy for users of all levels to find the information needed to understand and configure features. The following descriptions will help you to determine where to go from here. Understanding the Basics If you have little or no prior experience with programming using bar code labels, you should review the first few pages of this chapter to familiarize yourself with the basics of scanner programming before performing any changes to your configuration. Product Reference Guide 6-1 Integrating the Scanner With Your Host System Your scanner MUST be equipped with the correct hardware (interface board, cable, etc.) to properly communicate with your host system. Contact your dealer for information if you have questions about your scanner’s hardware compatibility. You may also want to contact the dealer or your system administrator if you have no record of how your scanner was pre-programmed at the factory. Scanners are typically programmed with the default settings for specific interface types (see Appendix E, Factory Defaults for more information); however, your scanner may have been custom configured with settings that are unique to your company or application. Once you know the scanner’s current settings, you can determine what changes will be required to allow communication with your host system and/or optional features you choose to modify to customize your installation. After recording the modifications needed, finish reading this chapter, then turn to the appropriate page and follow the instructions to program the scanner. When all scanner features are programmed to your satisfaction, the scanner is ready to be placed into operation. Customizing Your Scanner’s Operation Most scanner programming falls within three general categories: 6-2 • General Scanner and Scale Features — are features common to all interface types. Examples include beeper adjustments such as volume and length, read verification settings, etc. • EAS Features — control the settings for interfacing with the Sensormatic® ScanMax ProTM EAS device. Magellan® 9500 Integrating the Scanner With Your Host Sys- • CAUTION Interface Related Features — are the mandatory settings necessary to allow communication with your host terminal. Examples of these settings are: RS-232 baud rate and parity. It is possible, via programming bar codes, to change the interface type (for example: from RS-232 to IBM Port 17). Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED. Ensure that your planned modifications are compatible with the current interface. For example, baud rate selections are only valid in the RS-232 interface. The scanner will sound an error tone when scanning programming labels for features invalid to the current interface group. NOTE • Symbology Programming — gives the scanner the capability to autodiscriminate as few as one, and as many as all available symbologies. For optimal scanner performance enable only those symbologies required. Additionally the scanner may be programmed with the standard options available for the various symbologies, such as check digit, minimum label length, fixed and variable length bar codes, etc. If you experience difficulties, have questions or require additional information, contact your local distributor, or call your dealer or sales representative. Product Reference Guide 6-3 Programming Overview The scanner’s programmable feature settings can be modified to accommodate your system’s unique requirements. These settings can be communicated to the scanner in one of three ways: 1. Commands can be sent directly from the host. A limited set of host commands are available. Refer to Appendix D for more details or contact Tech Support. 2. The easiest, most comprehensive way to program the scanner is to use the Configurator Express™ On-Screen Programmining Kit. Ask your dealer for more information about this product. 3. Programming bar code labels can also be used to modify the scanner’s programmable settings. This manual provides the bar code labels and instructions necessary to configure the scanner’s features and options. When you program the scanner using any of the methods above, the scanner will store the changes until reprogrammed or returned to factory defaults. NOTE Programming via Handheld Device The scanner can also accept programming via its auxilliary port using a handheld scanning device. Eligible handheld devices must have the ability to transmit Code 128 function codes such as the programming bar codes presented in this manual. Datalogic models QuickScan® 1000 and QuickScan® 6000 support this functionality. Handheld data format requirements (baud rate, parity, etc.) are presented in Appendix F of this manual. Additionally the programmable feature, Aux Port Mode, must be set to “External Handheld Input” to allow operation. 6-4 Magellan® 9500 Programming Overview What Is Programming Mode? Programming Mode is a state in which the scanner must be placed in order to accept commands via programming bar code labels. When programming using the bar code labels in this manual, the scanner is typically placed in Programming Mode by scanning the SWITCH label. While in the Programming Mode, the scanner only recognizes ONLY the special programming bar codes contained in this programming guide. See Appendix A for information about scanner indications while in the Programming Mode. Entering and Exiting Programming Mode. Use the bar code label below to enter and exit (‘switch” into and out of ) Programming Mode. SWITCH LABEL Product Reference Guide 6-5 Programming Session A typical programming session is conducted as follows: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code to place the scanner in Programming Mode. Depending upon its current programming, the scanner may emit a beep or beeps, indicating it has read the bar code and the scanner (top) green LED will flash on and off slowly while the scanner remains in Programming Mode. Normal scanning functions are disabled. 2. Scan the programming bar code(s) that is (are) specially encoded to make the desired changes. With few exceptions1, the scanner will emit a triple beep each time you scan a valid programming bar code. Not all features are available for all interfaces and the scanner will sound an error tone when scanning programming bar codes for features invalid to the current interface. Only features supported by the currently active interface will be implemented. NOTE If a bar code is scanned that changes the scanner’s interface, all previous configuration items scanned in the programming session are lost. NOTE Additionally, when programming a feature requiring you to scan single digits to set a multi-digit number, such as Minimum Label Length, scanning the SWITCH bar code (or any item tag/item value bar code) before completing all input will result in an error tone and cause the scanner to exit Programming Mode. Under these circumstances, the current feature you were trying to set is thrown out; any previous bar codes scanned during the session will take effect. 1. Some features, such as Minimum Label Length, require you to select the label’s length by scanning a series of single-digit bar codes. A single ‘good read’ beep is sounded when scanning these single digits in Programming Mode. Only the final required digit in the sequence will produce a triple beep when scanned, indicating a successfully programmed feature. 6-6 Magellan® 9500 Programming Overview NOTE It is recommended that programming sessions be limited to one feature at a time. Should you make a mistake in the programming sequence, it can be difficult to discover where an error has been made if several features are programmed at once. Additionally, it can be confusing to determine which features may or may not have been successfully set following such a session. 3. Scan the SWITCH bar code to save any new settings and exit Programming Mode. The scanner will sound a beep and reset upon exiting Programming Mode, and the green LED will return to its usual state (on steady or off ). The scanner will exit Programming Mode under the following conditions: — the programming sequence has been completed or the SWITCH bar code is scanned — five minutes have passed without scanning activity. Any data programmed during the current session will be ignored1, and the scanner will reset and revert to its condition previous to initiating the exited session. — power is disconnected. Disconnecting power during Programming Mode, before scanning the SWITCH bar code, will cause all new settings to be ignored. On power-up, the scanner will return to previous settings. 4. Maintain a good record of all changes made to ensure that you know if the original factory settings have been changed. 1. Exception: If an interface bar code had been read while in Programming Mode, the scanner will operate on the default settings for the new interface. Product Reference Guide 6-7 Programming Sequence To modify a scanner feature (item), the programming bar codes contained in this manual must be scanned in a given sequence depending upon the feature being programmed (as shown in Table 6-1). There are three possible programming sequences: NOTE If the scanner’s interface type must be changed, always be sure that interface configuration is the FIRST item scanned during a programming session. (Selecting an interface type resets ALL other configuration items to the factory default for that interface type.) A. Programming sample A (the most commonly used format) demonstrates how three bar codes are scanned in sequence to do the following: 1. Place the scanner in Programming Mode (SWITCH bar code). 2. Scan the Item Tag1 that will enable the new feature. 3. End the programming session and reset the scanner (SWITCH bar code). B. Sample B provides an example of a programming feature requiring the entry of a range value. Like sample A, the scanner is placed in Programming Mode and an Item Tag1 is scanned. Then, a value must be entered before ending the programming session. In the example, three digits must be scanned from the number pad in Appendix C. This type of format, requiring several bar codes, is necessary to allow flexible programming for item values with larger numeric ranges. C. The programming sequence shown in example C requires scanning of a single, extended length bar code. This special programming bar code contains all the data necessary to enter Programming Mode, set the Item Tag1 and Item Value, and exit Programming Mode (all in one step). 1. An “Item Tag” is a term used to describe an assigned number, which is encoded in a programming bar code, that toggles (selects, enables, disables, etc.) a specific programming feature. 6-8 Magellan® 9500 Programming Overview Table 6-1. Programming Sequence SET A ITEM TAG ITEM VALUE END/RESET 1 2 3 SWITCH ENABLE NEW FEATURE SWITCH 1 2 345 6 0 B SWITCH C ENABLE NEW FEATURE USING THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS... 0 8 SWITCH 1 ONE BAR CODE CONTAINS SWITCH + ITEM TAG + ITEM VALUE + SWITCH Product Reference Guide 6-9 LED and Beeper Indicators The scanner provides a set of indicators that verify/announce the various scanner functions. If You Make a Mistake... If, during a programming session, you find that you are unsure of the scanner’s settings or wish to reset the scanner’s configuration, use the Return to Factory Settings label below to return the scanner’s configuration to the factory settings. Scanning this label will also reset any changes made during previous programming sessions. Return to Factory Settings Scan this bar code to return the scanner to the default settings configured at the factory for the currently active interface. This bar code is typically used to return the scanner to a “known” operating state when the present programming status is not known, faulty, or suspect. Use this bar code with caution, since it will reset ALL features that may have been programmed since the scanner’s installation. CAUTION NOTE DO NOT scan the SWITCH bar code before and after scanning this bar code, as the bar code below automatically enters and exits Programming Mode as a part of its function. If this bar code is scanned following a SWITCH bar code, it will simply cause the scanner to exit Programming Mode without making changes. RETURN TO FACTORY SETTINGS 6-10 Magellan® 9500 If You Make a Mistake... Test Mode Use this feature to place the scanner into a testing, or “demo” mode. This special mode disables the scanner interface, meaning that bar code data is not sent out to the host via the scanner interface. This allows the bar code to be scanned continuously without requiring a response from the POS terminal. To return the scanner to normal function, scan the TEST MODE = DISABLE bar code below. DO NOT scan the SWITCH bar code before and after scanning the bar codes on this page. NOTE Scanning the TEST MODE = DISABLE bar code sets the Double Read Timeout to 600ms. TEST MODE = DISABLE TEST MODE = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-11 General Scanner and Scale Features Double Read Timeout The Double Read Timeout feature sets a time limit that determines how much time must pass before reading the same label again (e.g. two identical items in succession). To set the Double Read Timeout: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. If the incidence of multiple reads is not acceptable, increase the Double Read Timeout setting to a higher value. NOTE DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT = 400ms DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT = 600ms 6-12 Magellan® 9500 General Scanner and Scale Features Double Read Timeout — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT = 800ms DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT = 1 SECOND Product Reference Guide 6-13 Laser Timeout The laser timeout feature sets the time for switching the visible laser diodes (VLDs) off if the scanner is idle. Using this feature can prolong the life of the VLDs. To set the Laser Timeout: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. LASER TIMEOUT = 5 MINUTES 6-14 Magellan® 9500 General Scanner and Scale Features Laser Timeout — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. LASER TIMEOUT = 10 MINUTES LASER TIMEOUT = 15 MINUTES Product Reference Guide 6-15 Motor Timeout The Motor Timeout feature sets the time for automatically switching the motor off when the scanner is not in use. Laser safety requires that the laser switch off before the motor. If you set the motor timeout shorter than the laser timeout, the motor and the laser will both shut off when the motor timeout expires. NOTE To set the Motor Timeout: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. MOTOR TIMEOUT = 5 MINUTES 6-16 Magellan® 9500 General Scanner and Scale Features Motor Timeout — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. MOTOR TIMEOUT = 10 MINUTES MOTOR TIMEOUT = 15 MINUTES Product Reference Guide 6-17 Motor Timeout — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. MOTOR TIMEOUT = 30 MINUTES MOTOR TIMEOUT = 60 MINUTES 6-18 Magellan® 9500 General Scanner and Scale Features Green LED Idle State This feature specifies the state of the green scanner LED when the scanner is idle and ready to read a label. Options are: • Off • On dim To set the LED Idle State: 1. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 2. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. GREEN LED IDLE STATE = OFF GREEN LED IDLE STATE = ON DIM Product Reference Guide 6-19 Scanner Button Options Configure the scanner volume button to one of the following modes of operation: • Enable all functions: Volume, tone, diagnostics and reset. • Enable only volume, tone and reset. • Enable reset only. • Disable all button functions To set the desired Scanner Button Option: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SCANNER BUTTON OPTION = ENABLE ALL FUNCTIONS SCANNER BUTTON OPTION = ENABLE ONLY VOLUME/TONE/RESET 6-20 Magellan® 9500 General Scanner and Scale Features Scanner Button Options — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. SCANNER BUTTON OPTION = ENABLE RESET ONLY SCANNER BUTTON OPTION = DISABLE ALL BUTTON FUNCTIONS Product Reference Guide 6-21 Power-up Beep Control Specifies the type of audible indication that is made when entering scanner-active mode on power-up. Choices are: • No beep • One beep • Three beeps To set the Power-up Beep: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the three bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. POWER-UP BEEP = OFF 6-22 Magellan® 9500 General Scanner and Scale Features Power-up Beep Control — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. POWER-UP BEEP = ONE BEEP POWER-UP BEEP = THREE BEEPS Product Reference Guide 6-23 Good Read Beep Control This feature enables/disables scanner beep upon successfully decoding of a label. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the two bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. GOOD READ BEEP = DISABLE GOOD READ BEEP = ENABLE 6-24 Magellan® 9500 General Scanner and Scale Features Good Read Beep Frequency Adjusts the scanner’s good read beep to sound at low, medium, or high frequency (controls the beeper’s pitch/tone). • Low = 660 Hz • Medium = 860 Hz • High = 1050 Hz To set the Good Read Beep Frequency: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the three bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. GOOD READ BEEP FREQUENCY = LOW Product Reference Guide 6-25 Good Read Beep Frequency — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. GOOD READ BEEP FREQUENCY = MEDIUM GOOD READ BEEP FREQUENCY = HIGH 6-26 Magellan® 9500 General Scanner and Scale Features Good Read Beep Length Specifies the duration of a good read beep. To set the good read beep length: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET GOOD READ BEEP LENGTH. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired good read beep length setting. The selectable range is 1-255, which is the timeout in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001-255). Examples: 001 = 10ms 005 = 50ms 040 = 400ms 250 = 2,500ms (2.5 seconds) 4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned SET GOOD READ BEEP LENGTH Product Reference Guide 6-27 Good Read Beep Volume Selects the beeper volume upon a good read beep. There are five selectable volumes, with each volume increment adding approximately five decibels to the previous level: • 0 = Lowest Volume • 1 = Medium-Low Volume • 2 = Medium Volume • 3 = Medium-High Volume • 4 =Highest Volume To set the Good Read Beep Volume: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selected volume bar code from this or the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME = LOWEST 6-28 Magellan® 9500 General Scanner and Scale Features Good Read Beep Volume — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME = MEDIUM LOW GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME = MEDIUM Product Reference Guide 6-29 Good Read Beep Volume — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME = MEDIUM HIGH GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME = HIGHEST 6-30 Magellan® 9500 General Scanner and Scale Features Good Read When to Indicate This feature specifies when the scanner will provide indication (beep and/ or flash its green LED) upon successfully reading a bar code. • Good Read = Indicate after decode • Good Read = Indicate after transmit • Good Read = Indicate after CTS goes inactive, then active The “Indicate after CTS goes inactive...” mode applies to RS-232 STD and RS232 WN interfaces only. If set to this mode in other interfaces, “Indicate after decode” mode will be implemented. NOTE To set the Good Read When to Indicate feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the desired mode bar code from this page. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. GOOD READ = INDICATE AFTER DECODE Product Reference Guide 6-31 Good Read When to Indicate — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. GOOD READ = INDICATE AFTER TRANSMIT GOOD READ = INDICATE AFTER CTS GOES INACTIVE, THEN ACTIVE (RS-232 ONLY) 6-32 Magellan® 9500 General Scanner and Scale Features Scale Enable Use this feature to enable or disable scale operation. Recalibration/recertification may be required when adding scale functionality. Consult your local Weights and Measures authority. NOTE If this feature is enabled the scanner will expect that it is to function as a scanner-scale, and will indicate an error if it is not a scale-equipped unit. See Error Codes in Chapter 4 for more information. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the two bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SCALE = DISABLE SCALE = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-33 Scale Country Mode When a weight is presented, the scanner/scale will apply the country-specific weighing rules specified via this feature. Scale Country Mode applies only when a scale is enabled. RS-232 SASI scale interface supports only U.S.A. mode. NOTE SCALE COUNTRY MODE = U.S.A. SCALE COUNTRY MODE = U.K. 6-34 Magellan® 9500 General Scanner and Scale Features Scale Country Mode — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. SCALE COUNTRY MODE = AUSTRALIA Product Reference Guide 6-35 Scale Enforced Zero Return This feature enables/disables the enforced zero return of the scale. Three settings are available for this feature: • Disable • Scale Must Return to Zero Weight Within Four Minutes — Scale will require re-zeroing if a non-zero weight is left on for more than 4 minutes • Scale Must Return to Zero Weight Between Weight Requests — Rezeroing required if weight doesn't return to zero between weight requests from the POS, plus scale will require re-zeroing if a nonzero weight is left on for more than 4 minutes. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. The strategy is to select the lowest possible filter level needed that allows normal scale operation. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SCALE ENFORCED ZERO RETURN = DISABLE 6-36 Magellan® 9500 General Scanner and Scale Features Scale Enforced Zero Return — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. SCALE ENFORCED ZERO RETURN = SCALE MUST RETURN TO ZERO WEIGHT WITHIN 4 MINUTES SCALE ENFORCED ZERO RETURN = SCALE MUST RETURN TO ZERO WEIGHT BETWEEN WEIGHT REQUESTS Product Reference Guide 6-37 Scale Interface Type Use this feature to select the scale interface type. Choices are: • No Scale Interface • RS-232 — SASI • RS-232 — ICL To set the Scale Interface Type: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SCALE INTERFACE TYPE = NO SCALE INTERFACE SCALE INTERFACE TYPE = RS-232 — SASI 6-38 Magellan® 9500 General Scanner and Scale Features Scale Interface Type — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. SCALE INTERFACE TYPE = RS-232 — ICL Product Reference Guide 6-39 Scale Motion Level Filter In environments where checkstands generate excessive vibration, the scale can be set to filter a certain amount of the motion with regard to its operation. This filter is generally used only in applications where scale error E_1 (too much motion at power-up) has occurred. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. The strategy is to select the lowest possible filter level needed that allows normal scale operation. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SCALE MOTION LEVEL FILTER = LOW SCALE MOTION LEVEL FILTER = MEDIUM LOW 6-40 Magellan® 9500 General Scanner and Scale Features Scale Motion Level Filter — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. SCALE MOTION LEVEL FILTER = MEDIUM HIGH SCALE MOTION LEVEL FILTER = HIGH Product Reference Guide 6-41 Scale LED Enable This feature enables/disables Scale LED (Yellow LED) operation. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the two bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SCALE LED = DISABLE SCALE LED = ENABLE 6-42 Magellan® 9500 General Scanner and Scale Features Remote Display — Enable/Disable The scanner-scale can be configured to operate with or without a Remote Display. Recalibration/recertification may be required when adding a Remote Display. Consult your local Weights and Measures authority. NOTE If this feature is enabled the scanner-scale will expect that it is connected to a Remote Display, and will indicate an error if one is not. See Error Codes in Chapter 4 for more information. REMOTE DISPLAY = DISABLE REMOTE DISPLAY = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-43 Aux Port Mode Selects the usage for the scanner’s optional auxilliary port. The choices listed below are mutually exclusive (only one option can be active at a time). • Disabled — Port is inactive • External Handheld Input — Supports Datalogic® handheld scanners (QuickScan 1000, QuickScan 6000, PowerScan) as well as other models such as the Symbol® HotShot. Call your dealer for more information about supported devices. Cable pinout information for the Aux Port is provided in Appendix B of this manual. A connected handheld scanner must be configured to transmit data as outlined in Appendix F. NOTE • PIR — PIR (Productivity Index Reporting) allows the scanner to provide information to an external computer indicating how easy the label was to read. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. AUX PORT MODE = DISABLE 6-44 Magellan® 9500 General Scanner and Scale Features Aux Port Mode — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. AUX PORT MODE = EXTERNAL HANDHELD INPUT AUX PORT MODE = PIR Product Reference Guide 6-45 Laser Failure Mode This configuration item selects whether the scanner should continue operating if only one laser is functional. (The scanner has two lasers: One for the horizontal window, and one for the vertical window.) Options for this feature are: • Single Laser Failure OK — The scanner can still operate even if one laser is no longer functional. In this mode the scanner will read only from the window associated with the operational laser. This provides the user the ability to continue working until the unit is serviced. The 7-segment display will show the error code for the failed laser (reference Error Codes in 4), but the scanner will continue to function. • Single Laser Failure Fatal — If it is desirable to have maximum performance or nothing at all, Laser Failure Mode should be selected as fatal. Upon single laser failure, the scanner will sound an error tone and cease scanning functions until serviced. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. LASER FAILURE MODE = SINGLE LASER FAILURE OK LASER FAILURE MODE = SINGLE LASER FAILURE FATAL 6-46 Magellan® 9500 General Scanner and Scale Features Productivity Index Reporting (PIR)/Cashier Training (CT) When PIR/CT is enabled, label quality data is appended to decoded data before being presented to the POS. The PIR feature allows the scanner to provide information to an external computer indicating how easy the label was to read. CT allows the scanner to provide feedback to the cashier on how to scan in a more ergonomic fashion. This value-added feature is a factory-programmed option. Contact your dealer for information about upgrading your system to include this advanced capability. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. PIR/CT = DISABLE PIR/CT = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-47 EAS Features EAS Mode This controls the mode of operation for interfacing with the Sensormatic® ScanMax ProTM EAS device. Choices are: • Disabled = EAS deactivation turned off. • Coupled Mode = EAS tag is deactivated only upon successful scanning of an item’s barcode or via manual push button. • Decoupled Mode = EAS deactivation is performed independently of barcode scanning. • Hybrid Mode = EAS system is armed whenever the scanner is enabled and the deactivation beep is sounded when an EAS tag is deactivated. Deactivation can only be initiated manually if the manual EAS deactivation push button is armed to do so. Reference the feature, Manual EAS Deactivation Push Button for more information. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. 6-48 Magellan® 9500 EAS Features EAS Mode — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. EAS MODE = DISABLE EAS MODE = COUPLED MODE Product Reference Guide 6-49 EAS Mode — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. EAS MODE = DECOUPLED MODE EAS MODE = HYBRID MODE 6-50 Magellan® 9500 EAS Features EAS Beep Duration Sets the duration of the EAS successful deactivation beep, specified in 10ms increments. The beep only occurs if EAS mode is not disabled. To set the EAS Beep Duration: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET EAS BEEP DURATION below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired EAS Beep Duration. The selectable range is 0255, which is the timeout in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a threedigit entry (000-255). Examples: 000 = EAS beep disabled 001 = 10ms 005 = 50ms 040 = 400ms 250 = 2,500ms (2.5 seconds) 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET EAS BEEP DURATION Product Reference Guide 6-51 EAS Retry Count This feature sets the number of times the deactivation sequence (defined by the feature, “EAS Deactivation Duration — Retry ”) is restarted after a failed deactivation attempt. To set the EAS Retry Count: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET EAS RETRY COUNT below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired number. The selectable range is 0-15 resets. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a two-digit entry (00-15). A setting of zero specifies no deactivation retries upon failed deactivation attempt. NOTE 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET EAS RETRY COUNT 6-52 Magellan® 9500 EAS Features Manual EAS Deactivation Push Button This feature is for use in Coupled Mode1. When it is enabled, EAS deactivation can be manually initiated by placing the item with the EAS tag downstream2 of the horizontal scan window and pushing the Manual EAS Deactivation Push Button. The scanner emits a clicking sound while in deactivation state. NOTE Duration of deactivation state is determined by the feature, EAS Deactivation Duration — Manual. Options are: • DISABLE — Manual EAS Deactivation Push Button disabled. • ENABLE ALWAYS —The Manual EAS Deactivation Push Button is always enabled. • ENABLE ONLY WHEN SCANNER ENABLED — The Manual EAS Deactivation Push Button is only available when the scanner is enabled and running. Statistics are collected each time the Manual EAS Deactivation Push Button is used to deactivate an EAS tag. NOTE 1. See “EAS Mode” on page 48. for more information about Coupled Mode. 2. “Downstream” in this case is defined as being the downstream side of the scan window from the direction of product flow, or scanning direction. Product Reference Guide 6-53 Manual EAS Deactivation Push Button — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. MANUAL EAS DEACTIVATON PUSH BUTTON = DISABLE MANUAL EAS DEACTIVATON PUSH BUTTON = ENABLE ALWAYS 6-54 Magellan® 9500 EAS Features Manual EAS Deactivation Push Button — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. MANUAL EAS DEACTIVATON PUSH BUTTON = ENABLE ONLY WHEN SCANNER ENABLED Product Reference Guide 6-55 EAS Deactivation Duration — Coupled Specifies the amount of time EAS deactivation is operative once the function has been initiated following a bar code read. This setting pertains only to units configured for EAS Coupled Mode. Reference the EAS Mode description for more information about Coupled and Decoupled EAS operation. NOTE To set the EAS Deactivation Duration — Coupled: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET EAS DEACTIVATION DURATION — COUPLED below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired duration. The selectable range is 1-255, which is the duration in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001255). Examples: 005 = 50ms 040 = 400ms 250 = 2,500ms (2.5 seconds) 4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned. SET EAS DEACTIVATION DURATION — COUPLED 6-56 Magellan® 9500 EAS Features EAS Deactivation Duration — Retry Specifies the amount of time EAS deactivation is operative once the function has been initiated following EAS tag detection (prior to bar code read).. This setting pertains only to units configured for EAS Coupled Mode. Reference the “EAS Mode ” description for more information about Coupled and Decoupled EAS operation. Also reference “EAS Retry Count .” NOTE To set the EAS Deactivation Duration — Retry: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET EAS DEACTIVATION DURATION — RETRY below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired duration. The selectable range is 1-255, which is the duration in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a 3-digit entry (001-255). Examples: 005 = 50ms 040 = 400ms 250 = 2,500ms (2.5 seconds) The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned SET EAS DEACTIVATION DURATION — RETRY Product Reference Guide 6-57 EAS Deactivation Duration — Manual Specifies the amount of time EAS deactivation is operative upon pushing the Manual EAS Deactivation Push Button. This setting pertains only to units configured for EAS Coupled Mode. Reference the “EAS Mode ” description for more information about Coupled and Decoupled EAS operation. Also reference “EAS Retry Count .” NOTE To set the EAS Deactivation Duration — Manual: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET EAS DEACTIVATION DURATION — MANUAL below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired duration. The selectable range is 1-255, which is the duration in 50-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a 3-digit entry (001-255). Examples: 001 = 50ms 008 = 400ms 050 = 2,500ms (2.5 seconds) The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned SET EAS DEACTIVATION DURATION — MANUAL 6-58 Magellan® 9500 Interface Related Features Interface Related Features Interface Type Specifies the current scanner interface. Selections are: INTERFACE TYPE INTERFACE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERa RS-232 Standard 05 RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf 12 RS-232 Single Cable 20 IBM USB 45 IBM Port 17 04 NOT USER-SELECTABLE Null Interface Indicated by 7-segment FRU display flashing 0 at start-up a. To access a scanner’s interface identification number, place the scanner in Scanner Diagnostic Mode and view the 7-segment FRU display (reference Scanner Diagnostic Mode in Chapter 2 for more information). NOTE A new scanner may have been shipped from the factory with a Null Interface (no interface type selected) to ensure system compatibility at installation. In this case, the correct Interface Type programming bar code must be scanned first before the scanner can be used with a POS system. NOTE If the scanner’s interface type must be changed, always be sure that interface configuration is the FIRST item scanned during a programming session. (Selecting an interface type resets ALL other configuration items to the factory default for that interface type.) Product Reference Guide 6-59 Interface Type — continued To select the desired interface: CAUTION Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED. When an interface is selected, the scanner loads the factory configuration for that interface as the selection is made, erasing any and all custom configuration that may have previously been done. NOTE 1. Disconnect current interface cable(s) if currently connected. 2. Scan the SWITCH bar code 3. Scan the bar code representing the appropriate interface located on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes adjacent to and on any facing pages to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. NOTE Once the correct interface has been set, it will be necessary to proceed to the appropriate pages in this manual that select parameters and options for that interface. For example, if RS-232 is selected, turn to the pages in this manual headed as features specific to the RS-232 interface. 5. Connect new interface cable(s). 6-60 Magellan® 9500 Interface Related Features RS-232 Interface Selection Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. CAUTION Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED. INTERFACE TYPE = RS-232 STANDARD Product Reference Guide 6-61 RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf Interface Selection Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. CAUTION Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED. INTERFACE TYPE = RS-232 WINCOR-NIXDORF 6-62 Magellan® 9500 Interface Related Features RS-232 Single Cable Interface Selection Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. CAUTION Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED. Single cable installations require connection at the POS Terminal (host) port. The Scale Host port connection is not used for this interface. NOTE INTERFACE TYPE = RS-232 SINGLE CABLE Product Reference Guide 6-63 IBM Port 17 Interface Selection Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. CAUTION Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED. Single cable installations require connection at the POS Terminal (host) port. The Scale Host port connection is not used for this interface. NOTE INTERFACE TYPE = IBM PORT 17 6-64 Magellan® 9500 Interface Related Features IBM USB Interface Selection Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. CAUTION Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED. Single cable installations require connection at the POS Terminal (host) port. The Scale Host port connection is not used for this interface. NOTE INTERFACE TYPE = IBM USB Product Reference Guide 6-65 Maximum Host-Transmitted Message Length Specifies the maximum number of data characters allowed in messages transmitted to the host. To set the Maximum Host-Transmitted Message Length: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET MAXIMUM HOST-TRANSMITTED MESSAGE LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired maximum host-transmitted message length. The selectable range is 0-249 data characters. (Labels that are longer than this length are not read.) Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (000-249). If this configuration item is set to 0 (000), there is no general length limit imposed on data being transmitted to the host. NOTE 4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned SET MAXIMUM HOST-TRANSMITTED MESSAGE LENGTH 6-66 Magellan® 9500 Interface Related Features Number of Host Transmission Buffers Specifies the number of host transmission(s) that may be buffered. By buffering data from a bar code, the scanner can continue to read a new bar code while the old one is being transmitted to the host. Selecting BUFFERS = 1 means that the first bar code must be transmitted before a new one can be read. A selection of BUFFERS = 2 means that a new bar code can be read while data from the first bar code is transmitted. When the feature, Good Read Beep Control, is enabled, the scanner will beep when the data is placed in a transmission buffer. When a DISABLE SCANNER command is received from the host, the scanner will continue to transmit all data that is buffered. To select the Number of Host Transmission Buffers: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan bar code below representing the desired setting. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. NUMBER OF HOST TRANSMISSION BUFFERS = 1 NUMBER OF HOST TRANSMISSION BUFFERS = 2 Product Reference Guide 6-67 Global Prefix This feature applies to RS-232 interfaces (Standard, Wincor-Nixdorf, and Single Cable). It specifies the prefix that is added to beginning of label transmission. To specify the Global Prefix Character(s): 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET GLOBAL PREFIX below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate characters/digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the hex designation for the desired character(s). A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. Up to 20 hex pairs can be designated. To specify “no Global Prefix,” scan 00. NOTE 4. If designating the full 20 hex pairs, the scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned. If designating less than 20 hex pairs, you can end the programming sequence early by scanning the TERMINATE SEQUENCE bar code. 5. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. 6-68 Magellan® 9500 Interface Related Features Global Prefix — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. SET GLOBAL PREFIX TERMINATE SEQUENCE Product Reference Guide 6-69 Global Suffix This feature applies to RS-232 interfaces (Standard, Wincor-Nixdorf, and Single Cable). It specifies the suffix that is added to end of a label transmission. Three standard options are available below. Contact your dealer for other alternate settings for this feature. • No Global Suffix • CR — Carriage Return • CR LF — Carriage Return, Line Feed To set the Global Suffix: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. GLOBAL SUFFIX = NO GLOBAL SUFFIX 6-70 Magellan® 9500 Interface Related Features Global Suffix — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. GLOBAL SUFFIX = CR GLOBAL SUFFIX = CR LF Product Reference Guide 6-71 IBM Features IBM Interface Options IBM interfaces offer specific control over interaction with certain devices. The IBM USB interface provides its own set of options. Refer to the feature, IBM USB Interface Options, in this chapter. NOTE Options for this feature are as follows: • FULL host interface support — Accepts scanner and scale configuration host commands. • Ignore host interface configuration of scanner and scale — Ignores all scanner and scale configuration host commands. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. IBM INTERFACE OPTION = FULL HOST INTERFACE SUPPORT IBM INTERFACE OPTION = IGNORE HOST I/F CONFIG OF SCANNER & SCALE 6-72 Magellan® 9500 IBM Features IBM Scale Address This feature applies to IBM Port 17 ONLY. NOTE Specifies IBM scale address for IBM Port 17. The following three addresses are available: • 6A • 6B • 6E To set the IBM Scale Address: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code below or from the following page that represents the desired scale address designation. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. IBM SCALE ADDRESS = 6A Product Reference Guide 6-73 IBM Scale Address — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. IBM SCALE ADDRESS = 6B IBM SCALE ADDRESS = 6E 6-74 Magellan® 9500 IBM Features IBM Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format This feature enables/disables scanner's ability to set a symbology identifier for a specified label to Code 39 before transmitting that label data to an IBM host. This applies to: Code 128, Code 93 and Codabar for IBM Port 5B; Code 93 and Codabar for IBM Port 9B; Code 128, Code 93 and Codabar for IBM-USB. When enabled, this feature has no effect on IBM Port 17. NOTE To enable/disable the IBM Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. IBM TRANSMIT LABELS IN CODE 39 FORMAT = DISABLE IBM TRANSMIT LABELS IN CODE 39 FORMAT = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-75 IBM USB Interface Options The IBM-USB interface offers specific control over interaction with certain devices. Options for this feature are as follows: • FULL host interface support — Accepts scanner and scale configuration host commands. • Compatible with Magellan SL host interface support — Uses Magellan SL host interface support. • Ignore host interface configuration of scanner and scale — Ignores all scanner and scale configuration host commands. This feature applies only to the IBM USB interface. For other IBM interfaces, refer to the feature, IBM Interface Options, earlier in this chapter. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. IBM USB INTERFACE OPTION = FULL HOST INTERFACE SUPPORT 6-76 Magellan® 9500 IBM Features IBM USB Interface Options — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. IBM USB INTERFACE OPTION = COMPATIBLE W/MAGELLAN SL HOST I/F SUPPORT IBM USB INTERFACE OPTION = IGNORE HOST I/F CONFIG OF SCANNER & SCALE Product Reference Guide 6-77 IBM USB Scanner Device Type The IBM-USB protocol allows for the scanner to be identified as one of two different types of barcode scanners. Depending on what other scanners you may already have connected to a USB POS, you may need to change this setting to enable all scanners to communicate. Options are: • Table Top Scanner • Handheld Scanner To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. IBM USB SCANNER DEVICE TYPE = TABLE TOP SCANNER IBM USB SCANNER DEVICE TYPE = HANDHELD SCANNER 6-78 Magellan® 9500 RS-232 Features RS-232 Features RS-232 Baud Rate This feature selects the baud rate required for sending and receiving data. Single cable interfaces are limited to Baud Rate selections up to 19200. They cannot communicate at Baud Rates of 38400 and up. NOTE To specify the RS-232 Baud Rate: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the desired baud rate from the bar codes below and on the immediately following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. RS-232 BAUD RATE = 1200 RS-232 BAUD RATE = 2400 Product Reference Guide 6-79 RS-232 Baud Rate — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. RS-232 BAUD RATE = 4800 RS-232 BAUD RATE = 9600 6-80 Magellan® 9500 RS-232 Features RS-232 Baud Rate — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. RS-232 BAUD RATE = 19200 RS-232 BAUD RATE = 38400 Product Reference Guide 6-81 RS-232 Baud Rate — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. RS-232 BAUD RATE = 57600 RS-232 BAUD RATE = 115200 6-82 Magellan® 9500 RS-232 Features RS-232 Number of Data Bits Specifies number of data bits required for sending and receiving data. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired Data Bit setting. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. RS-232 NUMBER OF DATA BITS = 7 RS-232 NUMBER OF DATA BITS = 8 Product Reference Guide 6-83 RS-232 Number of Stop Bits Specifies number of stop bits required for sending and receiving data. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired Stop Bit setting. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. RS-232 NUMBER OF STOP BITS = 1 RS-232 NUMBER OF STOP BITS = 2 6-84 Magellan® 9500 RS-232 Features RS-232 Parity Specifies parity required for sending and receiving data. Options for this setting are: • RS-232 PARITY = NONE • RS-232 PARITY = EVEN • RS-232 PARITY = ODD To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code below or on the following pages representing the desired Parity setting. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes, as well as facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. RS-232 PARITY = NONE Product Reference Guide 6-85 RS-232 Parity — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. RS-232 PARITY = EVEN RS-232 PARITY = ODD 6-86 Magellan® 9500 RS-232 Features RS-232 Hardware Control Enables/disables use of the RS-232 CTS signal for flow control and/or scan control. Options are: • Disable — The scanner transmits to the host regardless of any activity on the CTS line. • Enable CTS Flow Control — The CTS signal controls transmission of data to the host. • Enable CTS Scan Control — The CTS line must be active for scanner to read and transmit data. While the CTS line is inactive, scanner remains in a host- disabled state; following a successful label transmission, the CTS signal must transition to inactive and then to active to enable scanning for the next label. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan bar code below or from the following page for the desired setting. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. RS-232 HARDWARE CONTROL = DISABLE Product Reference Guide 6-87 RS-232 Hardware Control — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. RS-232 HARDWARE CONTROL = ENABLE CTS FLOW CONTROL RS-232 HARDWARE CONTROL = ENABLE CTS SCAN CONTROL 6-88 Magellan® 9500 RS-232 Features RS-232 Intercharacter Delay Specifies delay between the end of one character and the beginning of the next in 10-millisecond increments. To set the RS-232 Intercharacter Delay: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code below, SET RS-232 INTERCHARACTER DELAY. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired delay. The selectable range is 0-100, which is the delay in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (000-100). Examples: 001 = 10ms 005 = 50ms 040 = 400ms 100 = 1,000ms (1 second) 4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned. SET RS-232 INTERCHARACTER DELAY Product Reference Guide 6-89 RS-232 Software Flow Control Enables/disables RS-232 Flow Control using XON/ XOFF characters. . This item will be ignored when the feature, RS-232 NAK Character, is enabled NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. RS-232 SOFTWARE FLOW CONTROL = DISABLE RS-232 SOFTWARE FLOW CONTROL = ENABLE 6-90 Magellan® 9500 RS-232 Features RS-232 Host Echo When enabled, this feature passes all data through the scanner to the host as it comes in. This feature is used for applications where “daisy chaining” of RS-232 devices onto the same cable is necessary. If, for example, one of the devices in the chain is a terminal where someone is entering data while another person is simultaneously scanning a bar code requiring transmission to the host, the scanner will wait for the RS-232 channel to be quiet for a specified period of time (set via RS-232 Host Echo Quiet Interval). The scanner can be set to observe this delay before sending its data in order to avoid RS-232 transmission conflicts. NOTE When RS-232 Host Echo is enabled, the following features are ignored: RS232 Software Flow Control and RS-232 ACK NAK Enable as well as all other ACK/ NAK related operations, plus processing of RS-232 host commands. To enable/disable this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. RS-232 HOST ECHO = DISABLE RS-232 HOST ECHO = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-91 RS-232 Host Echo Quiet Interval This setting specifies the time interval of RS-232 channel inactivity which must transpire before the scanner will break the host echo loop to transmit the bar code data that has just been scanned to the host. • 0 - 100 = Time in 10-millisecond increments. To set the Host Echo Quiet Interval: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code below, SET RS-232 HOST ECHO QUIET INTERVAL. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired timeout. The selectable range is 0-100, which is the timeout in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (000100). Examples: 001 = 10ms 005 = 50ms 040 = 400ms 100 = 1,000ms (1 second) 4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned. SET RS-232 HOST ECHO QUIET INTERVAL 6-92 Magellan® 9500 RS-232 Features RS-232 Ignore Host Commands When set to ignore host commands, the scanner will ignore all host commands except for the minimum set necessary to keep the interface active, transmit labels, and transmit scale information. For normal operation of the interface, disable this feature. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. RS-232 IGNORE HOST COMMANDS = DISABLE RS-232 IGNORE HOST COMMANDS = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-93 RS-232 TTL Specifies whether RS-232 interface provides TTL levels on the output pins TxD and RTS. Choices are: • Normal RS-232 levels • TTL levels To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code below which represents the desired setting for this feature. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. RS-232 LEVELS = NORMAL RS-232 RS-232 LEVELS = TTL 6-94 Magellan® 9500 RS-232 Features RS-232 TTL Invert Enables/disables inversion of TTL. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code below which represents the desired setting for this feature. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. RS-232 TTL INVERT = DISABLE RS-232 TTL INVERT = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-95 RS-232 Beep on ASCII BEL Enables/disables ability of scanner to beep (sound a good read tone) on receiving an ASCII BEL (07 hex). • Disable • Enable To enable/disable this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. RS-232 BEEP ON ASCII BEL = DISABLE RS-232 BEEP ON ASCII BEL = ENABLE 6-96 Magellan® 9500 RS-232 Features RS-232 Beep After Weigh Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to beep after weight data is transmitted to the host. Scale interfaces that support this item are: RS-232 ICL, RS-232 SASI, and RS-232 Single Cable. To enable/disable the Beep After Weigh feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. BEEP AFTER WEIGH = DISABLE BEEP AFTER WEIGH = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-97 RS-232 Beep on Not on File Select for the host to beep (or not) when a not-on-file condition is detected by the host. This feature is also applicable to single cable RS-232. RS-232 BEEP ON NOT ON FILE = DISABLE RS-232 BEEP ON NOT ON FILE = ENABLE 6-98 Magellan® 9500 RS-232 Features RS-232 ACK NAK Enable This enables/disables the ability of the scanner to support the RS-232 ACK/NAK protocol. When configured, the scanner and/or host sends an “ACK” when it receives data properly, and sends “NAK” when the data is in error. Selections for this option are: • Disable • Label Transmission — the scanner expects an ACK/NAK response from the host when a label is sent) • Host Acknowledgement — Enabled for Host Commands (the scanner will respond with ACK/NAK when the host sends a command) • Label & Host — Enabled for both Label Transmission & Host Commands To select the option for RS-232 ACK NAK Enable: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the desired option from bar codes below and on the following page. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. RS-232 ACK NAK = DISABLE RS-232 ACK/NAK = LABEL TRANSMISSION Product Reference Guide 6-99 RS-232 ACK NAK Enable — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. RS-232 ACK/NAK = HOST ACKNOWLEDGEMENT RS-232 ACK/NAK = LABEL & HOST 6-100 Magellan® 9500 RS-232 Features RS-232 ACK Character This feature specifies which ASCII character will be used as an ACK character. NOTE DO NOT set this feature to use previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF or host commands as this will conflict with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the feature, RS-232 Number of Data Bits, is set to 7 data bits. To specify the RS-232 ACK Character: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET RS-232 ACK CHARACTER below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the hex designation for the desired character. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for the desired character. For example, if ASCII “A” were the desired ACK character, you would scan the digits “4”, then “1” (the ASCII corresponding hex value). 4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits/characters have been scanned. SET RS-232 ACK CHARACTER Product Reference Guide 6-101 RS-232 NAK Character This feature specifies which ASCII character will be used as a NAK character. NOTE DO NOT set this feature to use previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF or host commands as this will conflict with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the feature, RS-232 Number of Data Bits, is set to 7 data bits. To specify the RS-232 NAK Character: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET RS-232 NAK CHARACTER below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the hex designation for the desired character. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for the desired character. For example, if ASCII “A” were the desired NAK character, you would scan the digits “4”, then “1” (the ASCII corresponding hex value). 4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits/characters have been scanned. SET RS-232 NAK CHARACTER 6-102 Magellan® 9500 RS-232 Features RS-232 Retry on ACK NAK Timeout This option specifies the action scanner performs on expiration of the RS232 ACK NAK Timeout Value. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. RS-232 RETRY ON ACK NAK TIMEOUT = DISABLE RS-232 RETRY ON ACK NAK TIMEOUT = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-103 RS-232 ACK NAK Timeout Value This item specifies the time the scanner will wait for an ACK character from the host following a label transmission. • 0 = Infinite timeout • 1 - 75 = Timeout in 200-millisecond increments To set the ACK NAK Timeout Value: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code below, SET RS-232 ACK NAK TIMEOUT VALUE. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired timeout. A setting of 0 specifies an infinite timeout. The remaining selectable range is 1-75, which is the timeout in 200-millisecond increments. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (00-75). Examples: 00 = Infinite timeout 01 = 200ms 05 = 1,000ms (1 second) 40 = 8,000ms (8 seconds) 75 = 15,000ms (15 seconds) 4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned. SET RS-232 ACK NAK TIMEOUT VALUE 6-104 Magellan® 9500 RS-232 Features RS-232 ACK NAK Retry Count This feature sets the number of times for the scanner to retry a label transmission under a retry condition. To set the RS-232 ACK NAK Retry Count: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET RS-232 ACK NAK RETRY COUNT below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired number. The selectable range is 0-255 resets. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (000-255). A setting of 255 specifies “retry forever.” NOTE 4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned. SET RS-232 ACK NAK RETRY COUNT Product Reference Guide 6-105 RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling This item specifies the method the scanner will use to handle errors detected while waiting to receive the ACK character from the host. Errors include unrecognized host commands and communication errors such as parity or framing errors. • Ignore Errors (recommended setting) • Assume ACK (risk of lost label data) • Assume NAK (risk of duplicate label) To select the option for RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the desired option from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. RS-232 ACK NAK ERROR HANDLING = IGNORE ERRORS 6-106 Magellan® 9500 RS-232 Features RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. RS-232 ACK NAK ERROR HANDLING = ASSUME ACK RS-232 ACK NAK ERROR HANDLING = ASSUME NAK Product Reference Guide 6-107 RS-232 Label ID Control This feature specifies whether or not Label IDs are transmitted to the host and if so, whether to attach them as a prefix or suffix. RS-232 LABEL ID CONTROL = DISABLE RS-232 LABEL ID CONTROL = ENABLE AS PREFIX 6-108 Magellan® 9500 RS-232 Features RS-232 Label ID Control — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. RS-232 LABEL ID CONTROL = ENABLE AS SUFFIX Product Reference Guide 6-109 Single Cable RS-232 Options The RS-232 Single Cable interface shares some configuration options with other RS-232 interfaces. Rather than repeat them in this chapter as Single Cable options, please find them referenced as follows: 6-110 • RS-232 Baud Rate on page 79 • RS-232 Number of Data Bits on page 83 • RS-232 Number of Stop Bits on page 84 • RS-232 Parity on page 85 • RS-232 Software Flow Control on page 90 • RS-232 Beep After Weigh on page 97 • RS-232 Beep on Not on File on page 98 • RS-232 Label ID Control on page 108 Magellan® 9500 Single Cable RS-232 Options Single Cable RS-232 Scanner Only Protocol This sets the type of interface protocol that will be used in Single Cable RS-232. Options are: • Scanner/scale RS-232 protocol • Scanner only RS-232 protocol To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired option. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SINGLE CABLE RS-232 PROTOCOL = SCANNER/SCALE SINGLE CABLE RS-232 PROTOCOL = SCANNER ONLY Product Reference Guide 6-111 Single Cable RS-232 RTS CTS Selection Specifies how RTS and CTS are used to control the data flow. RTS is controlled by the Scanner and can be continuously held high/low, or can be asserted during label transmission. The scanner looks at CTS, as the configuration values state, to determine when to send label data. Choices are: • Option 0 = RTS is held in low state and CTS is ignored • Option 1 = RTS is held in high state and CTS is ignored • Option 2 = Assert RTS and wait for CTS to be asserted • Option 3 = Assert RTS and ignore CTS • Option 4 = RTS held low, wait for CTS to be asserted • Option 5 = RTS held high, wait for CTS to be asserted To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan a bar code below or on the following pages representing the desired option. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes, as well as facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 0 RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 1 6-112 Magellan® 9500 Single Cable RS-232 Options Single Cable RS-232 RTS CTS Selection — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 2 RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 3 Product Reference Guide 6-113 Single Cable RS-232 RTS CTS Selection — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 4 RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 5 6-114 Magellan® 9500 Single Cable RS-232 Options Single Cable RS-232 Use BCC Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to use BCC. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE BCC = DISABLE SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE BCC = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-115 Single Cable RS-232 Use ACK/NAK Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to use ACK/NAK. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE ACK/NAK = DISABLE SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE ACK/NAK = ENABLE 6-116 Magellan® 9500 Single Cable RS-232 Options Single Cable RS-232 Use STX Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to use STX. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE STX = DISABLE SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE STX = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-117 Set Single Cable RS-232 STX Character This feature selects the STX character. To specify the STX Character: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET SINGLE CABLE RS-232 STX CHARACTER below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate characters/digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the decimal designation for the desired character. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding decimal values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning decimal digits for each character. Pad all numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001-127). Thus, to set a single character value of A, bar codes containing the digits ‘0’, ‘6’ and ‘5’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any decimal value from 001 to 127. 4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned. SET SINGLE CABLE RS-232 STX CHARACTER 6-118 Magellan® 9500 Single Cable RS-232 Options Single Cable RS-232 Use ETX Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to use ETX. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE ETX = DISABLE SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE ETX = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-119 Set Single Cable RS-232 ETX Character Allows selection of the ETX character. To specify the ETX Character: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET SINGLE CABLE RS-232 ETX CHARACTER below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate characters/digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the decimal designation for the desired character. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding decimal values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning decimal digits for each character. Pad all numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001-127). Thus, to set a single character value of A, bar codes containing the digits ‘0’, ‘6’ and ‘5’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any decimal value from 001 to 127. 4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned. SET SINGLE CABLE RS-232 ETX CHARACTER 6-120 Magellan® 9500 Symbology Programming Symbology Programming If the scanner’s interface type must be changed, always be sure that interface configuration is the FIRST item scanned during a programming session. (Selecting an interface type resets ALL other configuration items — including symbology programming — to the factory default for that interface type.) NOTE UPC-A Enable Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode UPC-A labels. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. UPC-A = DISABLE UPC-A = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-121 UPC-A Number System Character Transmission Enables/disables transmission of a UPC-A number system character. This feature MUST be enabled for IBM interfaces for proper function. This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. UPC-A NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE UPC-A NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE 6-122 Magellan® 9500 UPC-A Enable UPC-A Check Character Transmission Enables/disables transmission of a UPC-A check character. This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. UPC-A CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE UPC-A CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-123 Expand UPC-A to EAN-13 Enables/disables expansion of UPC-A labels to EAN/JAN-13. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. EXPAND UPC-A TO EAN/JAN-13 = DISABLE EXPAND UPC-A TO EAN/JAN-13 = ENABLE 6-124 Magellan® 9500 UPC-A Enable UPC/EAN AIM ID This feature enables/disables transmission of the UPC/EAN AIM symbology identifier. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. UPC/EAN AIM ID = DISABLE UPC/EAN AIM ID = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-125 UPC-A Label ID This feature specifies a UPC-A label ID to be added to bar code data. The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-A LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET UPC-A LABEL ID 6-126 Magellan® 9500 UPC-A Enable UPC-A 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID This feature specifies a UPC-A 2-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data. The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-A 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET UPC-A 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID Product Reference Guide 6-127 UPC-A 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID This feature specifies a UPC-A 5-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data. The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-A 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET UPC-A 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID 6-128 Magellan® 9500 UPC-A Enable UPC-A 128 Supplemental Label ID This feature specifies a UPC-A 128 Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data. The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-A 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET UPC-A 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID Product Reference Guide 6-129 UPC-E Enable Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode UPC-E labels. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. UPC-E = DISABLE UPC-E = ENABLE 6-130 Magellan® 9500 UPC-E Enable UPC-E Number System Character Transmission Enables/disables transmission of a UPC-E number system character. This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. UPC-E NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE UPC-E NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-131 UPC-E Check Character Transmission Enables/disables transmission of a UPC-E check character. This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. UPC-E CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE UPC-E CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE 6-132 Magellan® 9500 UPC-E Enable Expand UPC-E to UPC-A Enables/disables expansion of UPC-E labels to UPC-A. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. EXPAND UPC-E TO UPC-A = DISABLE EXPAND UPC-E TO UPC-A = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-133 Expand UPC-E to EAN-13 Enables/disables expansion of UPC-E labels to EAN/JAN-13. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. EXPAND UPC-E TO EAN/JAN-13 = DISABLE EXPAND UPC-E TO EAN/JAN-13 = ENABLE 6-134 Magellan® 9500 UPC-E Enable UPC-E Label ID This feature specifies a UPC-E label ID to be added to bar code data. The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-E LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET UPC-E LABEL ID Product Reference Guide 6-135 UPC-E 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID This feature specifies a UPC-E 2-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data. The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-E 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET UPC-E 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID 6-136 Magellan® 9500 UPC-E Enable UPC-E 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID This feature specifies a UPC-E 5-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data. The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-E 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET UPC-E 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID Product Reference Guide 6-137 UPC-E 128 Supplemental Label ID This feature specifies a UPC-E 128 Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data. The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-E 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET UPC-E 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID 6-138 Magellan® 9500 EAN-13 Enable EAN-13 Enable Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN/JAN-13 labels. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. EAN-13 = DISABLE EAN-13 = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-139 EAN-13 First Character Transmission Enables/disables transmission of EAN/JAN-13 first character. This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. EAN-13 FIRST CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE EAN-13 FIRST CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE 6-140 Magellan® 9500 EAN-13 Enable EAN-13 Check Character Transmission Enables/disables transmission of an EAN/JAN-13 check character. This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. EAN-13 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE EAN-13 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-141 EAN-13 ISBN Conversion Enable Enables/disables conversion of EAN/JAN-13 labels starting with 978 to Bookland ISBN labels. If any add-on information is present on the label prior to the conversion to ISBN, the add-on data will be discarded. Only the base label will be converted. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. EAN-13 ISBN Conversion= DISABLE EAN-13 ISBN Conversion = ENABLE 6-142 Magellan® 9500 EAN-13 Enable EAN 13 Label ID This feature specifies an EAN 13 label ID to be added to bar code data. To set this feature: The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN 13 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET EAN 13 LABEL ID Product Reference Guide 6-143 EAN-13 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID This feature specifies an EAN-13 2-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data. The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-13 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET EAN-13 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID 6-144 Magellan® 9500 EAN-13 Enable EAN-13 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID This feature specifies an EAN-13 5-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data. The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-13 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET EAN-13 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID Product Reference Guide 6-145 EAN-13 128 Supplemental Label ID This feature specifies an EAN-13 128 Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data. The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-13 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID = DISABLE below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET EAN-13 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID = DISABLE 6-146 Magellan® 9500 EAN-13 Enable Bookland AIM ID This feature enables/disables transmission of the Bookland AIM symbology identifier. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. BOOKLAND AIM ID = DISABLE BOOKLAND AIM ID = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-147 Bookland Label ID This feature specifies a Bookland label ID to be added to bar code data. The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET BOOKLAND LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET BOOKLAND LABEL ID 6-148 Magellan® 9500 EAN-8 Enable EAN-8 Enable Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN/JAN-8 labels. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. EAN-8 = DISABLE EAN-8 = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-149 EAN-8 Check Character Transmission Enables/disables transmission of an EAN/JAN-8 check character. This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. EAN-8 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE EAN-8 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE 6-150 Magellan® 9500 EAN-8 Enable Expand EAN-8 to EAN-13 Enables/disables expansion of EAN/JAN-8 labels to EAN/JAN-13. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. EXPAND EAN/JAN-8 TO EAN/JAN-13 = DISABLE EXPAND EAN/JAN-8 TO EAN/JAN-13 = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-151 EAN 8 Label ID This feature specifies an EAN 8 label ID to be added to bar code data. To set this feature: The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN 8 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET EAN 8 LABEL ID 6-152 Magellan® 9500 EAN-8 Enable EAN-8 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID This feature specifies an EAN-8 2-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data. The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-8 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET EAN-8 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID Product Reference Guide 6-153 EAN-8 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID This feature specifies an EAN-8 5-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data. The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-8 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET EAN-8 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID 6-154 Magellan® 9500 EAN-8 Enable EAN-8 128 Supplemental Label ID This feature specifies an EAN-8 128 Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data. The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-8 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET EAN-8 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID Product Reference Guide 6-155 EAN-8 Decoding Levels Decoding levels allow the decoder to be set to perform at one of four selectable levels: • Very Conservative — Slower scan time, virtually eleminates misreads. The most secure setting. • Slightly More Aggressive — Faster scanning, more aggressive, yet minimizes misreads. • Moderately Aggressive — Even faster scanning, even more aggressive. • Very Aggressive — Fastest scan speed, most aggressive. Use caution when setting this feature, as the aggressive settings for this feature allow a higher potential for misreads. CAUTION To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. It is important to note that the default for this feature is the “Slightly More Aggressive” setting. For default settings for other features, see Appendix E. NOTE 6-156 Magellan® 9500 EAN-8 Enable EAN-8 Decoding Levels — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. EAN-8 DECODING LEVELS = VERY CONSERVATIVE EAN-8 DECODING LEVELS = SLIGHTLY MORE AGGRESSIVE Product Reference Guide 6-157 EAN-8 Decoding Levels — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. EAN-8 DECODING LEVELS = MODERATELY AGGRESSIVE EAN-8 DECODING LEVELS = VERY AGGRESSIVE 6-158 Magellan® 9500 Other UPC/EAN Options Other UPC/EAN Options The following pages contain other selectable features for UPC/EAN symbologies: • UPC/EAN Reconstruction • Price Weight Check • Enable EAN Two Label • Addons • UPC-A and EAN-13 Decoding Levels Product Reference Guide 6-159 UPC/EAN Reconstruction Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode a class of UPC/EAN labels with voids. The label voids may be caused by printing defects or physical damage. This feature may be helpful in environments with instore printed labels. Enabling this feature increases the potential of misreads. CAUTION To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. UPC/EAN RECONSTRUCTION = DISABLE UPC/EAN RECONSTRUCTION = ENABLE 6-160 Magellan® 9500 Other UPC/EAN Options Price Weight Check Enables/disables calculation and verification of price/weight check digits. Applies to all UPC-A and EAN/JAN-13 labels with eligible1 Number System/First Character digits. Options are: • Disable • 4-digit price/weight • 5-digit price/weight • 4-digit European price/weight • 5-digit European price/weight To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. PRICE WEIGHT CHECK = DISABLE 1. Price Weight Check generally applies to UPC-A labels with a Number System Digit of 2 and EAN/ JAN-13 labels with a First Character of 2. There are a total of six flag digits corresponding to the six types. Checking applies depending upon which type is enabled. Product Reference Guide 6-161 Price Weight Check — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. PRICE WEIGHT CHECK = 4-DIGIT PRICE/WEIGHT PRICE WEIGHT CHECK = 5-DIGIT PRICE/WEIGHT 6-162 Magellan® 9500 Other UPC/EAN Options Price Weight Check — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. PRICE WEIGHT CHECK = 4-DIGIT EUROPEAN PRICE/WEIGHT PRICE WEIGHT CHECK = 5-DIGIT EUROPEAN PRICE/WEIGHT Product Reference Guide 6-163 Enable EAN Two Label Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN two-label pairs. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. Table 6-2 Contact Customer Support for details about advanced programming for this feature. EAN TWO LABEL = DISABLE EAN TWO LABEL = ENABLE 6-164 Magellan® 9500 Other UPC/EAN Options Addons The scanner is capable of processing different types of addon codes, including: • 2-Digit Supplemental • 5-Digit Supplemental Options are provided on the following pages for your convenience: • Disable all addons — The scanner will not look for or read addons. • Optional 2-Digit and 5-Digit Supplemental — Bar codes can be read which include 2-Digit or 5-Digit Supplementals, however, it is not required that addons be included in bar codes. Contact customer support for advanced programming of optional and conditional addons. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option on this and the following page. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. ADDONS = DISABLE Product Reference Guide 6-165 Addons — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. ADDONS = OPTIONAL 2-DIGIT AND 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL 6-166 Magellan® 9500 Other UPC/EAN Options UPC-A and EAN-13 Decoding Levels Decoding levels allow the decoder to be set to perform at one of four selectable levels: • Very Conservative — Slower scan time, virtually eleminates misreads. The most secure setting. • Slightly More Aggressive — Faster scanning, more aggressive, yet minimizes misreads. • Moderately Aggressive — Even faster scanning, even more aggressive. • Very Aggressive — Fastest scan speed, most aggressive. Use caution when setting this feature, as the aggressive settings for this feature allow a higher potential for misreads. CAUTION To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. It is important to note that the default for this feature is the “Slightly More Aggressive” setting. For default settings for other features, see Appendix E. NOTE Product Reference Guide 6-167 UPC-A and EAN-13 Decoding Levels — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. UPC-A/EAN-13 DECODING LEVELS = VERY CONSERVATIVE UPC-A/EAN-13 DECODING LEVELS = SLIGHTLY MORE AGGRESSIVE 6-168 Magellan® 9500 Other UPC/EAN Options UPC-A and EAN-13 Decoding Levels — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. UPC-A/EAN-13 DECODING LEVELS = MODERATELY AGGRESSIVE UPC-A/EAN-13 DECODING LEVELS = VERY AGGRESSIVE Product Reference Guide 6-169 GTIN Enable Enables/Disables the ability to convert UPCE, UPCA, EAN8, and EAN13 labels into the GTIN 14-character format. If add-on information is present on the base label prior to the conversion taking place, the add-on information will be appended to the converted GTIN bar code. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. GTIN = DISABLE GTIN = ENABLE 6-170 Magellan® 9500 GTIN Enable GTIN Label ID This feature specifies a GTIN label ID to be added to bar code data when GTIN conversion is enabled. The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET GTIN LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF (for each of the two characters). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET GTIN LABEL ID Product Reference Guide 6-171 GTIN 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID This feature specifies a GTIN label ID to be added to bar code data when GTIN conversion is enabled and 2-digit supplemental addon bar code labels are converted. The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET GTIN 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF (for each of the two characters). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET GTIN 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID 6-172 Magellan® 9500 GTIN Enable GTIN 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID This feature specifies a GTIN label ID to be added to bar code data when GTIN conversion is enabled and 5-digit supplemental addon bar code labels are converted. The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET GTIN 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF (for each of the two characters). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET GTIN 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID Product Reference Guide 6-173 GTIN Code 128 Supplemental Label ID This feature specifies a GTIN label ID to be added to bar code data when GTIN conversion is enabled and Code 128 supplemental addon bar code labels are converted The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET GTIN CODE 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF (for each of the two characters). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET GTIN CODE 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID 6-174 Magellan® 9500 RSS-14 Enable RSS-14 Enable Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode RSS-14 labels. This value-added feature is a factory-programmed option. Contact your dealer for information about upgrading your system to include this advanced capability. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. RSS-14 = DISABLE RSS-14 = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-175 RSS-14 Check Character Transmission Enables/disables transmission of the RSS-14 check character. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. RSS-14 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE RSS-14 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE 6-176 Magellan® 9500 RSS-14 Enable RSS-14/EAN-128 Emulation Enables/disables the ability of RSS-14 to be transmitted as EAN-128. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. RSS-14/EAN-128 EMULATION = DISABLE RSS-14/EAN-128 EMULATION = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-177 RSS-14 2D Component Enable When this feature is enabled, and the software reads an RSS-14 bar code that has a 2D component associated with it, the RSS-14 bar code will not be reported to the terminal. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. RSS-14 2D COMPONENT = DISABLE RSS-14 2D COMPONENT = ENABLE 6-178 Magellan® 9500 RSS-14 Enable RSS-14 AIM ID This feature enables/disables transmission of the RSS-14 AIM symbology identifier. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. RSS-14 AIM ID = DISABLE RSS-14 AIM ID = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-179 RSS-14 Label ID This feature specifies an RSS-14 label ID to be added to bar code data. To set this feature: The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET RSS-14 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET RSS-14 LABEL ID 6-180 Magellan® 9500 RSS Expanded Enable RSS Expanded Enable Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode RSS-Expanded labels. This value-added feature is a factory-programmed option. Contact your dealer for information about upgrading your system to include this advanced capability. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. RSS-EXPANDED = DISABLE RSS-EXPANDED = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-181 RSS Expanded EAN-128 Emulation Enables/disables EAN-128 emulation for RSS Expanded. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. RSS EXPANDED/EAN-128 EMULATION = DISABLE RSS EXPANDED/EAN-128 EMULATION = ENABLE 6-182 Magellan® 9500 RSS Expanded Enable RSS Expanded 2D Component Enable When this feature is enabled, and the software reads an RSS Expanded bar code that has a 2D component associated with it, the RSS Expanded bar code will not be reported to the terminal. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. RSS EXPANDED 2D COMPONENT = DISABLE RSS EXPANDED 2D COMPONENT = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-183 RSS Expanded AIM ID This feature enables/disables transmission of the RSS Expanded AIM symbology identifier. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. RSS EXPANDED AIM ID = DISABLE RSS EXPANDED AIM ID = ENABLE 6-184 Magellan® 9500 RSS Expanded Enable RSS Expanded Label ID This feature specifies an RSS Expanded label ID to be added to bar code data. The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET RSS EXPANDED LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET RSS EXPANDED LABEL ID Product Reference Guide 6-185 RSS Expanded Length Control This feature specifies either variable-length or fixed-length decoding for RSS Expanded. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. NOTE If variable-length control was selected, you must now set the features RSS Expanded Maximum Label Length and RSS Expanded Minimum Label Length. If fixed-length control was selected, you must now set RSS Expanded Fixed Length 1 and RSS Expanded Fixed Length 2. RSS EXPANDED LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH RSS EXPANDED LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH 6-186 Magellan® 9500 RSS Expanded Enable RSS Expanded Maximum Label Length This feature specifies the maximum allowable length of an RSS Expanded label. Length in this case includes check and data characters. This applies when RSS Expanded Length Control is set to variable-length decoding. NOTE Maximum Label Length should be greater than or equal to Minimum Label Length. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET RSS EXPANDED MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired maximum label length. The selectable range for this option is 00 to 74. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (00-74). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET RSS EXPANDED MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH Product Reference Guide 6-187 RSS Expanded Minimum Label Length This feature specifies the minimum allowable length of an RSS Expanded label. Length in this case includes check and data characters. This applies when RSS Expanded Length Control is set to variable-length decoding. NOTE Minimum Label Length should be less than or equal to Maximum Label Length. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET RSS EXPANDED MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired minimum label length. The selectable range for this option is 00 to 74. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (00-74). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET RSS EXPANDED MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH 6-188 Magellan® 9500 RSS Expanded Enable RSS Expanded Fixed Length 1 This feature specifies RSS Expanded first fixed length. This applies when RSS Expanded Length Control is set to fixed-length decoding. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET RSS EXPANDED FIXED LENGTH 1 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for this option is 00 to 74. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (00-74). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET RSS EXPANDED FIXED LENGTH 1 Product Reference Guide 6-189 RSS Expanded Fixed Length 2 This feature specifies RSS Expanded second fixed length. This applies when RSS Expanded Length Control is set to fixed-length decoding. NOTE If Fixed Length 2 is set to 00 (zero), then Fixed Length 1 will apply. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET RSS EXPANDED FIXED LENGTH 2 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for this option is 00 to 74. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (00-74). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET RSS EXPANDED FIXED LENGTH 2 6-190 Magellan® 9500 Code 39 Enable Code 39 Enable Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Code 39 labels. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. CODE 39 = DISABLE CODE 39 = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-191 Code 39 Start Stop Character Transmission Enables/disables transmission of Code 39 start and stop characters. This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. CODE 39 START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE CODE 39 START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE 6-192 Magellan® 9500 Code 39 Enable Code 39 Check Character Calculation Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Code 39 check character. When disabled, any check character in label is treated as a data character. If check calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a misread can occur. NOTE In particular, if you are using variable length stitching, it is important to use check character calculation to prevent misreads. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. CODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE CODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-193 Code 39 Check Character Transmission Enables/disables transmission of optional Code 39 check character. This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. CODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE CODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE 6-194 Magellan® 9500 Code 39 Enable Code 39 Full ASCII Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to translate to Code 39 full ASCII labels. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. CODE 39 FULL ASCII = DISABLE CODE 39 FULL ASCII = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-195 Code 39 AIM ID This feature enables/disables transmission of the Code 39 AIM symbology identifier. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. CODE 39 AIM ID = DISABLE CODE 39 AIM ID = ENABLE 6-196 Magellan® 9500 Code 39 Enable Code 39 Label ID This feature specifies a Code 39 label ID to be added to bar code data. The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 39 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET CODE 39 LABEL ID Product Reference Guide 6-197 Code 39 Length Control This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding will be set for Code 39. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. If variable-length control was selected, you must now set the features Code 39 Maximum Label Length and Code 39 Minimum Label Length. If fixedlength control was selected, you must now set Code 39 Fixed Length 1 and Code 39 Fixed Length 2. NOTE When using variable length stitching, it is important to enable Code 39 Check Character Calculation to prevent misreads. CODE 39 LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH CODE 39 LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH 6-198 Magellan® 9500 Code 39 Enable Code 39 Maximum Label Length This feature specifies the maximum allowable length of a Code 39 label. Length in this case includes check, data and ASCII characters, but does not include start, or stop characters. This feature applies when Code 39 Length Control is set to variable-length decoding. NOTE Maximum label length should be greater than or equal to minimum label length. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 39 MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired maximum label length. The selectable range for this option is 00 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (00-50). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET CODE 39 MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH Product Reference Guide 6-199 Code 39 Minimum Label Length This feature specifies the minimum allowable length of a Code 39 label. Length in this case includes check, data and ASCII characters, but does not include start, or stop characters. This feature applies when Code 39 Length Control is set to variable-length decoding. NOTE Minumum label length should be less than or equal to maximum label length. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 39 MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired minimum label length. The selectable range for this option is 00 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (00-50). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET CODE 39 MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH 6-200 Magellan® 9500 Code 39 Enable Code 39 Fixed Length 1 This feature specifies Code 39 first fixed length. This applies when Code 39 Length Control is set to fixed-length decoding. NOTE The minimum decodable length is four when an optional check character is present. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 39 FIXED LENGTH 1 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for this option is 00 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (00-50). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET CODE 39 FIXED LENGTH 1 Product Reference Guide 6-201 Code 39 Fixed Length 2 This feature specifies Code 39 second fixed length. This applies when Code 39 Length Control is set to fixed-length decoding. If Fixed Length 2 is set to 00, then Fixed Length 1 will apply NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 39 FIXED LENGTH 2 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for this option is 00, no second fixed length, or 01 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (00-50). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET CODE 39 FIXED LENGTH 2 6-202 Magellan® 9500 Code 39 Enable Code 39 Stitching Enables/disables stitching for Code 39 labels. When parts of a Code 39 bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. CODE 39 STITCHING = DISABLE CODE 39 STITCHING = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-203 Pharmacode 39 Enable Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Italian Pharmacode 39 labels. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. PHARMACODE 39 = DISABLE PHARMACODE 39 = ENABLE 6-204 Magellan® 9500 Pharmacode 39 Enable Pharmacode 39 Start Stop Character Transmission Enables/ disables transmission of start and stop characters for Pharmacode 39. This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. PHARMACODE 39 START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE PHARMACODE 39 START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-205 Pharmacode 39 Check Character Transmission Enables/disables transmission of Pharmacode 39 check character. This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. PHARMACODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE PHARMACODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE 6-206 Magellan® 9500 Pharmacode 39 Enable Pharmacode 39 Label ID This feature specifies a Pharmacode 39 label ID to be added to bar code data. The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET PHARMACODE 39 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET PHARMACODE 39 LABEL ID Product Reference Guide 6-207 Code 128 Enable Enables/disables1 the ability of the scanner to decode Code 128 labels. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. CODE 128 = DISABLE CODE 128 = ENABLE 1. Exception: The Code 128 symbology is always enabled with regard to scanning/reading the special C128 programming bar codes provided in this manual. 6-208 Magellan® 9500 Code 128 Enable Code 128 Transmit Function Characters Enables/disables transmission of Code 128 function characters 1, 2, 3, and 4. Disabled is the recommended setting for all interfaces. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. CODE 128 TRANSMIT FUNCTION CHARACTERS = DISABLE CODE 128 TRANSMIT FUNCTION CHARACTERS = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-209 Convert Code 128 to Code 39 Enables/disables conversion of Code 128 labels to Code 39. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. CONVERT CODE 128 TO CODE 39 = DISABLE CONVERT CODE 128 TO CODE 39 = ENABLE 6-210 Magellan® 9500 Code 128 Enable Code 128 AIM ID This feature enables/disables transmission of the Code 128 AIM symbology identifier. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. CODE 128 AIM ID = DISABLE CODE 128 AIM ID = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-211 Code 128 Label ID This feature specifies a Code 128 label ID to be added to bar code data.. The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 128 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET CODE 128 LABEL ID 6-212 Magellan® 9500 Code 128 Enable Code 128 Length Control This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding will be set for Code 128. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. NOTE If variable-length control was selected, you must now set the features Code 128 Maximum Label Length and Code 128 Minimum Label Length. If fixed-length control was selected, you must now set Code 128 Fixed Length 1 and Code 128 Fixed Length 2. CODE 128 LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH CODE 128 LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH Product Reference Guide 6-213 Code 128 Maximum Label Length This feature specifies the maximum allowable length of a Code 128 label. Length in this case includes function characteres and data characters, but does not include function code change or check character. This feature applies when Code 128 Length Control is set to variable-length decoding. NOTE Maximum label length should be greater than or equal to minimum label length. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 128 MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired maximum label length. The selectable range for this option is 01 to 80. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-80). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET CODE 128 MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH 6-214 Magellan® 9500 Code 128 Enable Code 128 Minimum Label Length This feature specifies the minimum allowable length of a Code 128 label. Length in this case includes function characteres and data characters, but does not include function code change or check character. This feature applies when Code 128 Length Control is set to variable-length decoding. NOTE Minumum label length should be less than or equal to maximum label length. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 128 MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired minimum label length. The selectable range for this option is 01 to 80. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-80). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET CODE 128 MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH Product Reference Guide 6-215 Code 128 Fixed Length 1 This feature specifies Code 128 first fixed length. This applies when Code 128 Length Control is set to fixed-length decoding. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 128 FIXED LENGTH 1 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for this option is 01 to 80. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-80). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET CODE 128 FIXED LENGTH 1 6-216 Magellan® 9500 Code 128 Enable Code 128 Fixed Length 2 This feature specifies Code 128 second fixed length. This applies when Code 128 Length Control is set to fixed-length decoding. If Fixed Length 2 is set to 00 (zero), then Fixed Length 1 will apply. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 128 FIXED LENGTH 2 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for this option is 01 to 80. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-80). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET CODE 128 FIXED LENGTH 2 Product Reference Guide 6-217 Code 128 Stitching Enables/disables stitching for Code 128 labels. When parts of a Code 128 bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. CODE 128 STITCHING = DISABLE CODE 128 STITCHING = ENABLE 6-218 Magellan® 9500 EAN-128 Enable EAN-128 Enable Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN-128 labels. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. EAN-128 = DISABLE EAN-128 = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-219 EAN-128 AIM ID This feature enables/disables transmission of the EAN-128 AIM symbology identifier. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. EAN-128 AIM ID = DISABLE EAN-128 AIM ID = ENABLE 6-220 Magellan® 9500 EAN-128 Enable EAN-128 Label ID This feature specifies an EAN-128 label ID to be added to bar code data.. The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-128 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET EAN-128 LABEL ID Product Reference Guide 6-221 Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) Enable Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Interleaved 2 of 5 labels. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. I 2 OF 5 = DISABLE I 2 OF 5 = ENABLE 6-222 Magellan® 9500 Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) Enable I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Interleaved 2 of 5 check character. If check character calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a misread can occur. When disabled, any check characters in a bar code are treated as data characters. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. I 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE I 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-223 I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission Enables/disables transmission of an optional Interleaved 2 of 5 check character. This feature applies only when I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation is enabled. This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. I 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE I 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE 6-224 Magellan® 9500 Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) Enable I 2 of 5 AIM ID This feature enables/disables transmission of the I 2 of 5 AIM symbology identifier. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. I 2 of 5 AIM ID = DISABLE I 2 of 5 AIM ID = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-225 I 2 of 5 Label ID This feature specifies an I 2 of 5 label ID to be added to bar code data.. The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET I 2 of 5 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET I 2 of 5 LABEL ID 6-226 Magellan® 9500 Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) Enable I 2 of 5 Length Control This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding will be set for I 2 of 5. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. NOTE If variable-length control was selected, you must now set the features I 2 of 5 Maximum Label Length and I 2 of 5 Minimum Label Length. If fixed-length control was selected, you must now set I 2 of 5 Fixed Length 1 and I 2 of 5 Fixed Length 2. I 2 OF 5 LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH I 2 OF 5 LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH Product Reference Guide 6-227 I 2 of 5 Maximum Label Length This feature specifies the maximum allowable length of an I 2 of 5 label. Length in this case includes check and data characters, but does not include start or stop characters. This feature applies when I 2 of 5 Length Control is set to variable-length decoding. NOTE Maximum label length should be greater than or equal to minimum label length. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET I 2 OF 5 MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired maximum label length. The selectable range for this option is 02 to 50, even numbers only. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (02-50). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET I 2 OF 5 MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH 6-228 Magellan® 9500 Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) Enable I 2 of 5 Minimum Label Length This feature specifies the minimum allowable length of an I 2 of 5 label. Length in this case includes check and data characters, but does not include start or stop characters. This feature applies when I 2 of 5 Length Control is set to variable-length decoding. NOTE Minimum label length should be less than or equal to maximum label length. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET I 2 OF 5 MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired minimum label length. The selectable range for this option is 02 to 50, even numbers only. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (02-50). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET I 2 OF 5 MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH Product Reference Guide 6-229 I 2 of 5 Fixed Length 1 This feature specifies I 2 of 5 first fixed length. This applies when I 2 of 5 Length Control is set to fixed-length decoding. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET I 2 OF 5 FIXED LENGTH 1 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for this option is 02 to 50, even numbers only. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (02-50). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET I 2 OF 5 FIXED LENGTH 1 6-230 Magellan® 9500 Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) Enable I 2 of 5 Fixed Length 2 This feature specifies I 2 of 5 second fixed length. This applies when I 2 of 5 Length Control is set to fixed-length decoding. If Fixed Length 2 is set to 00 (zero), then Fixed Length 1 will apply. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET I 2 OF 5 FIXED LENGTH 2 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for this option is 00, or 02 to 50; even numbers only. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (02-50). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET I 2 OF 5 FIXED LENGTH 2 Product Reference Guide 6-231 I 2 of 5 Stitching Enables/disables stitching for I 2 of 5 labels. When parts of an I 2 of 5 bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. I 2 of 5 Stitching operates using fixed lengths ONLY. I 2 of 5 Fixed Length 1 and/or I 2 of 5 Fixed Length 2 must be properly configured for stitching to work. NOTE I 2 OF 5 STITCHING = DISABLE I 2 OF 5 STITCHING = ENABLE 6-232 Magellan® 9500 Codabar Enable Codabar Enable Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Codabar labels. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. CODABAR = DISABLE CODABAR = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-233 Codabar Start Stop Character Transmission Enables/disables transmission of Codabar start and stop characters. This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE 6-234 Magellan® 9500 Codabar Enable Codabar Start Stop Character Set This feature selects the format of transmitted Codabar start/stop characters. Options are: • ABCD/TN* E • ABCD/ABCD • abcd/tn* e • abcd/abcd To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code below or from the following page representing the desired option. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes and facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER = ABCD/TN* E CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER = ABCD/ABCD Product Reference Guide 6-235 Codabar Start Stop Character Set — continued Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER = abcd/tn* e CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER = abcd/abcd 6-236 Magellan® 9500 Codabar Enable Codabar Start Stop Character Match Enables/disables the requirement that start and stop characters match. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER MATCH = DISABLE CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER MATCH = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-237 Codabar Check Character Calculation Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Codabar check character. If check character calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a misread can occur. When disabled, any check characters in a bar code are treated as data characters. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. CODABAR CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE CODABAR CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE 6-238 Magellan® 9500 Codabar Enable Codabar Check Character Transmission Enables/disables transmission of an optional Codabar check character. Applies only when Codabar Check Character Calculation is enabled. This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. CODABAR CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE CODABAR CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-239 Codabar AIM ID This feature enables/disables transmission of the Codabar AIM symbology identifier. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. CODABAR AIM ID = DISABLE CODABAR AIM ID = ENABLE 6-240 Magellan® 9500 Codabar Enable Codabar Label ID This feature specifies a Codabar label ID to e added to bar code data. The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODABAR LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET CODABAR LABEL ID Product Reference Guide 6-241 Codabar Length Control This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding will be set for Codabar. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. NOTE If variable-length control was selected, you must now set the features Codabar Maximum Label Length and Codabar Minimum Label Length. If fixedlength control was selected, you must now set Codabar Fixed Length 1 and Codabar Fixed Length 2. CODABAR LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH CODABAR LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH 6-242 Magellan® 9500 Codabar Enable Codabar Maximum Label Length This feature specifies the maximum allowable length of a Codabar label. Length in this case includes start, stop or check and data characters, but does not include full ASCII shift characters. This feature applies when Codabar Length Control is set to variable-length decoding. NOTE Maximum label length should be greater than or equal to minimum label length. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODABAR MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired maximum label length. The selectable range for this option is 03 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (03-50). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET CODABAR MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH Product Reference Guide 6-243 Codabar Minimum Label Length This feature specifies the minimum allowable length of a Codabar label. Length in this case includes start, stop or check and data characters, but does not include full ASCII shift characters. This feature applies when Codabar Length Control is set to variable-length decoding. NOTE Minimum label length should be less than or equal to maximum label length. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODABAR MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired minimum label length. The selectable range for this option is 03 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (03-50). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET CODABAR MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH 6-244 Magellan® 9500 Codabar Enable Codabar Fixed Length 1 This feature specifies Codabar first fixed length. Length in this case includes start, stop or check and data characters, but does not include full ASCII shift characters. This feature applies when Codabar Length Control is set to fixed-length decoding. NOTE Decodable length is four when the optional check character is present. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODABAR FIXED LENGTH 1 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for this option is 03 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (03-50). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET CODABAR FIXED LENGTH 1 Product Reference Guide 6-245 Codabar Fixed Length 2 This feature specifies Codabar second fixed length. Length in this case includes start, stop or check and data characters, but does not include full ASCII shift characters. This feature applies when Codabar Length Control is set to fixed-length decoding. NOTE Decodable length is four when the optional check character is present. If Fixed Length 2 is set to 00 (zero), then Fixed Length 1 will apply. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODABAR FIXED LENGTH 2 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for this option is 00, or 03 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (03-50). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET CODABAR FIXED LENGTH 2 6-246 Magellan® 9500 Codabar Enable Codabar Stitching Enables/disables stitching for Codabar labels. When parts of a Codabar bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. Codabar Stitching operates using fixed lengths ONLY. Codabar Fixed Length 1 and/or Codabar Fixed Length 2 must be properly configured for stitching to work. NOTE CODABAR STITCHING = DISABLE CODABAR STITCHING = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-247 Code 93 Enable Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Code 93 labels. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. CODE 93 = DISABLE CODE 93 = ENABLE 6-248 Magellan® 9500 Code 93 Enable Code 93 AIM ID This feature enables/disables transmission of the Code 93 AIM symbology identifier. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. CODE 93 AIM ID = DISABLE CODE 93 AIM ID = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-249 Code 93 Label ID This feature specifies a Code 93 label ID to be added to bar code data.. The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 93 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET CODE 93 LABEL ID 6-250 Magellan® 9500 Code 93 Enable Code 93 Length Control This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding will be set for Code 93. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. NOTE If variable-length control was selected, you must now set the features Code 93 Maximum Label Length and Code 93 Minimum Label Length. If fixedlength control was selected, you must now set Code 93 Fixed Length 1 and Code 93 Fixed Length 2. CODE 93 LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH CODE 93 LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH Product Reference Guide 6-251 Code 93 Maximum Label Length This feature specifies the maximum allowable length of a Code 93 label. Length in this case includes data characters, but does not include start, stop, full ASCII shift, or check characters. This feature applies when Code 93 Length Control is set to variable-length decoding. NOTE Maximum label length should be greater than or equal to minimum label length. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 93 MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired maximum label length. The selectable range for this option is 01 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-50). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET CODE 93 MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH 6-252 Magellan® 9500 Code 93 Enable Code 93 Minimum Label Length This feature specifies the minimum allowable length of a Code 93 label. Length in this case includes data characters, but does not include start, stop, full ASCII shift, or check characters. This feature applies when Code 93 Length Control is set to variable-length decoding. NOTE Minimum label length should be less than or equal to maximum label length. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 93 MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired minimum label length. The selectable range for this option is 01 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-50). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET CODE 93 MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH Product Reference Guide 6-253 Code 93 Fixed Length 1 This feature specifies Code 93 first fixed length. This applies when Code 93 Length Control is set to fixed-length decoding. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 93 FIXED LENGTH 1 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for this option is 01 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-50). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET CODE 93 FIXED LENGTH 1 6-254 Magellan® 9500 Code 93 Enable Code 93 Fixed Length 2 This feature specifies Code 93 second fixed length. This applies when Code 93 Length Control is set to fixed-length decoding. If Fixed Length 2 is set to 00 (zero), then Fixed Length 1 will apply. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 93 FIXED LENGTH 2 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for this option is 00, or 01 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-50). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET CODE 93 FIXED LENGTH 2 Product Reference Guide 6-255 Code 93 Stitching Enables/disables stitching for Code 93 labels. When parts of a Code 93 bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. CODE 93 STITCHING = DISABLE CODE 93 STITCHING = ENABLE 6-256 Magellan® 9500 MSI/Plessey Enable MSI/Plessey Enable Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode MSI/Plessey labels. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. MSI/PLESSEY = DISABLE MSI/PLESSEY = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-257 MSI/Plessey Check Character Calculation Enables/disables calculation and verification of optional MSI/Plessey check characters. If check character calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a misread can occur. When disabled, any check characters in a bar code are treated as data characters. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. MSI/PLESSEY CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE MSI/PLESSEY CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE 6-258 Magellan® 9500 MSI/Plessey Enable MSI/Plessey Number of Check Characters Specifies number of MSI/Plessey check characters to be calculated and verified. Check characters are always modulus 10. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired number of MSI/ Plessey check characters to be calculated and verified. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. MSI/PLESSEY NUMBER OF CHECK CHARACTERS = 1 MSI/PLESSEY NUMBER OF CHECK CHARACTERS = 2 Product Reference Guide 6-259 MSI/Plessey Check Character Transmission Enables/disables transmission of optional MSI/Plessey check characters. This feature applies only when MSI/Plessey Check Character Calculation is enabled. This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. MSI/PLESSEY CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE MSI/PLESSEY CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE 6-260 Magellan® 9500 MSI/Plessey Enable MSI/Plessey AIM ID This feature enables/disables transmission of the MSI/Plessey AIM symbology identifier. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. MSI/PLESSEY AIM ID = DISABLE MSI/PLESSEY AIM ID = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-261 MSI/Plessey Label ID This feature specifies an MSI/Plessey label ID to be added to bar code data. The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET MSI/PLESSEY LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET MSI/PLESSEY LABEL ID 6-262 Magellan® 9500 MSI/Plessey Enable MSI/Plessey Length Control This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding will be set for MSI/Plessey. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. NOTE If variable-length control was selected, you must now set the features MSI/ Plessey Maximum Label Length and MSI/Plessey Minimum Label Length. If fixed-length control was selected, you must now set I 2 of 5 Fixed Length 1 and MSI/Plessey Fixed Length 2. MSI/PLESSEY LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH MSI/PLESSEY LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH Product Reference Guide 6-263 MSI/Plessey Maximum Label Length This feature specifies the maximum allowable length of an MSI/Plessey label. Length in this case includes check and data characters, but does not include start, stop or full ASCII shift characters. This feature applies when MSI/ Plessey Length Control is set to variable-length decoding. NOTE Maximum label length should be greater than or equal to minimum label length. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET MSI/PLESSEY MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired maximum label length. The selectable range for this option is 4 to 16. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (04-16). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET MSI/PLESSEY MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH 6-264 Magellan® 9500 MSI/Plessey Enable MSI/Plessey Minimum Label Length This feature specifies the minimum allowable length of an MSI/Plessey label. Length in this case includes check and data characters, but does not include start, stop or full ASCII shift characters. This applies when MSI/Plessey Length Control is set to variable-length decoding. NOTE Minimum label length should be less than or equal to maximum label length. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET MSI/PLESSEY MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired minimum label length. The selectable range for this option is 4 to 16. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (04-16). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET MSI/PLESSEY MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH Product Reference Guide 6-265 MSI/Plessey Fixed Length 1 This feature specifies MSI/Plessey first fixed length. This applies when MSI/Plessey Length Control is set to fixed-length decoding. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET MSI/PLESSEY FIXED LENGTH 1 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for this option is 4 to 16. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (04-16). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET MSI/PLESSEY FIXED LENGTH 1 6-266 Magellan® 9500 MSI/Plessey Enable MSI/Plessey Fixed Length 2 This feature specifies MSI/Plessey second fixed length. This applies when MSI/Plessey Length Control is set to fixed-length decoding. NOTE If Fixed Length 2 is set to 00 (zero), then Fixed Length 1 will apply. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET MSI/PLESSEY FIXED LENGTH 2 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for this option is 0 (zero), or 4 to 16. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (00, 04-16). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET MSI/PLESSEY FIXED LENGTH 2 Product Reference Guide 6-267 MSI/Plessey Stitching Enables/disables stitching for MSI/Plessey labels. When parts of an MSI/ Plessey bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. MSI/Plessey Stitching operates using fixed lengths ONLY. MSI/Plessey Fixed Length 1 and/or MSI/Plessey Fixed Length 2 must be properly configured for stitching to work. NOTE MSI/PLESSEY STITCHING = DISABLE MSI/PLESSEY STITCHING = ENABLE 6-268 Magellan® 9500 Standard 2 of 5 Enable Standard 2 of 5 Enable Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Standard 2 of 5 labels. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. STANDARD 2 OF 5 = DISABLE STANDARD 2 OF 5 = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-269 Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Standard 2 of 5 check character. If check character calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a misread can occur. When disabled, any check character in a bar code is treated as data character. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. STANDARD 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE STANDARD 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE 6-270 Magellan® 9500 Standard 2 of 5 Enable Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission Enables/disables transmission of an optional Standard 2 of 5 check character. This feature applies only when Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation is enabled. This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. STANDARD 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE STANDARD 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-271 Standard 2 of 5 AIM ID This feature enables/disables transmission of the Standard 2 of 5 AIM symbology identifier. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. STANDARD 2 of 5 AIM ID = DISABLE STANDARD 2 of 5 AIM ID = ENABLE 6-272 Magellan® 9500 Standard 2 of 5 Enable Standard 2 of 5 Label ID This feature specifies an Standard 2 of 5 label ID to be added to bar code data. The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET STANDARD 2 of 5 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET STANDARD 2 of 5 LABEL ID Product Reference Guide 6-273 Standard 2 of 5 Length Control This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding will be set for Standard 2 of 5. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. NOTE If variable-length control was selected, you must now set the features Standard 2 of 5 Maximum Label Length and Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Label Length. If fixed-length control was selected, you must now set Standard 2 of 5 Fixed Length 1 and Standard 2 of 5 Fixed Length 2. STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH 6-274 Magellan® 9500 Standard 2 of 5 Enable Standard 2 of 5 Maximum Label Length This feature specifies the maximum allowable length of a Standard 2 of 5 label. Length in this case includes check and data characters, but does not include start or stop characters. This feature applies when Standard 2 of 5 Length Control is set to variable-length decoding. NOTE Maximum label length should be greater than or equal to minimum label length. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired maximum label length. The selectable range for this option is 01 to 50, even numbers only. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-50). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH Product Reference Guide 6-275 Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Label Length This feature specifies the minimum allowable length of an Standard 2 of 5 label. Length in this case includes check and data characters, but does not include start or stop characters. This feature applies when Standard 2 of 5 Length Control is set to variable-length decoding. NOTE Minimum label length should be less than or equal to maximum label length. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired minimum label length. The selectable range for this option is 01 to 50, even numbers only. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-50). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH 6-276 Magellan® 9500 Standard 2 of 5 Enable Standard 2 of 5 Fixed Length 1 This feature specifies Standard 2 of 5 first fixed length. This applies when Standard 2 of 5 Length Control is set to fixedlength decoding. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 FIXED LENGTH 1 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for this option is 1 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-50). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 FIXED LENGTH 1 Product Reference Guide 6-277 Standard 2 of 5 Fixed Length 2 This feature specifies Standard 2 of 5 second fixed length. This applies when Standard 2 of 5 Length Control is set to fixed-length decoding. NOTE If Fixed Length 2 is set to 00 (zero), then Fixed Length 1 will apply. To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan the bar code, SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 FIXED LENGTH 2 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for this option is 1 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-50). 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 FIXED LENGTH 2 6-278 Magellan® 9500 Standard 2 of 5 Enable Standard 2 of 5 Stitching Enables/disables stitching for Standard 2 of 5 labels. When parts of a Standard 2 of 5 bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met. This applies when Standard 2 of 5 Length Control is set to fixed-length decoding. NOTE To set this feature: 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code. 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code. STANDARD 2 OF 5 STITCHING = DISABLE STANDARD 2 OF 5 STITCHING = ENABLE Product Reference Guide 6-279 NOTES 6-280 Magellan® 9500 Appendix A LED/Beeper Indications & Controls Figure A-1 shows the operator’s controls and indicators. The descriptions following identify the use or function of each component. Figure A-1. Scanner and Scale Controls Volume/Tone Push Button Scale Zero Push Button Scanner LED (Green) Scale LED (Yellow) EAS LED (Tri-Color) Manual EAS Deactivation Push Button Product Reference Guide A-1 Controls and Indicators The control panel consists of three indicator LEDs and three push buttons as described in the following pages. The unit also includes a beeper which can be configured to sound indications of scanning, weighing, and deactivation activities. Since beeper indications are configurable, your unit may not be programmed to sound all the indications listed. For more information, see the Programming chapter of this manual. NOTE LED and Beeper Indications Scanner and Scale LEDs Scanner (Green) LED Scale (Yellow) LED The Scanner LED (green, top-most) indicates scanner status, and the Scale LED (yellow, middle) is primarily used to show scale status (see Table A-1). Table A-1. Scanner and Scale LED Indications LED INDICATION DURATION Scale at Zeroa Scale (Yellow) LED on steady Scanner Activea Scanner (Green) LED on steady and dim (Normal Mode) Good Read Indicationa Program Mode Indication Sleep Mode Indication A-2 Scanner (Green) LED - bright flash Scanner (Green) LED - Continuous flashing Scanner (Green) LED flashes slowly COMMENT The scale is at rest and reads zero weight. The scale is ready to weigh. The scanner is ready for operation. Scanning is immediately available. Indicates a bar code has been read and decoded. Indicates the scanner is in Label Programming Mode. Cycle power to exit Programming Mode. The scanner motor and/or laser have automatically switched off and the unit has entered Sleep Mode due to extended inactivity. Magellan® 9500 Controls and Indicators Table A-1. Scanner and Scale LED Indications LED INDICATION Host Disabled DURATION Scanner (Green) LED 1-second off, 1/ 10-second on Audible low tone 1 second. Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) Warning (Error Mode) FRU Indication Alternating Scanner/Scale (Green/ Yellow) LEDs flash continuouslyb. Scanner (Green) LED flashes a coded sequence in concert with the speaker. COMMENT Host has disabled scanning. Serves notice that a fatal FRU failure has been detected. Consult Error Codes in 4 for more details. If a low tone is heard, but continuous flashing is not observed, the scanner can still function in a limited capacity. Call systems support for service in either case. Occurs ONLY upon Volume/Tone button push following a FRU warning. Enables service technicians to identify FRU failures. a. Certain functions of the Green and Yellow LEDs are selectable to be enabled or disabled. Your scanner may not be programmed to display all indications. b. For FRU error 9, the Deactivator LED (tri-color) is off. Product Reference Guide A-3 Deactivator LED EAS (Tri-Color) LED The Deactivator LED (tri-color, bottom-most) designates EAS deactivation status (see Table A-2). The table also provides information about special beeper indications which can be sounded in response to changes in deactivation status. Table A-2. EAS Indications EAS DEACTIVATION DISABLED INDICATION Deactivation Disabled LED DURATION Deactivation (Tri-color) LED is OFF EAS BEEPER COMMENT OFF Deactivation mode must be selected via programming. Reference EAS Mode. ALL MODES (COUPLED, DECOUPLED or HYBRID) Deactivation Ready Deactivation (Tri-color) LED is lit steadily Green. OFF Deactivation is ready. EAS tag Detected Deactivation (Tri-color) LED flashes Red. OFF An EAS tag has been sensed in the scan volume. Deactivation (Tri-color) LEDa blinks ON/OFF Red. OFF System is attempting to initialize EAS Power-up Initialization Deactivation (Tri-color) LED flashes Red while FRU Status LED flashes error code nine (9). EAS Error A-4 Low frequency beep (1 second) EAS system is not on line. Magellan® 9500 Controls and Indicators Table A-2. EAS Indications COUPLED MODE ONLY Deactivation Indicated Manual Deactivation in Progress Manual Deactivation Successful Deactivate EAS System When Failed Deactivation (Tri-color) LED flashes Red, then Orange, then returns to Green. Deactivation (Tri-color) LED is lit steadily Green. Deactivation (Tri-color) LED flashes Red, then Orange, then returns to Green. Deactivation (Tri-color) LED is flashing slowly Red. FRU Status LED displays error code nine (9) Good read beep follows deactivation. The EAS antenna has been triggered ON to deactivate a label following successful bar code read. Ticking sound (for configurable duration) The Manual EAS Deactivation Push Button was pressed & releasedb. High frequency beep An EAS tag was successfully deactivated via manual push button. Upon initiating this state (pressing EAS Button for 3 seconds): 3 highpitched beeps Upon EAS malfunction/failure, scanning function can continue independent of EAS if the EAS button is held for 3 seconds. DECOUPLED MODE Deactivation Indicated Deactivation (Tri-color) LED flashes Red. Product Reference Guide An EAS tag has been successfully deactivated. EAS Beep OFF A-5 Table A-2. EAS Indications HYBRID MODE Deactivation (Tri-color) LED flashes Red, then Orange, then returns to Green. Deactivation Indicated High frequency beep An EAS tag has been successfully deactivated. a. Additionally, the FRU LED (7-segment display located in the bottom of the optic cavity — visible through the horizontal scan window) blinks the number ‘9’. If EAS deactivation fails to initiate, a low, error tone will be sounded, and the FRU LED will display the error code ‘9’ steadily (without flashing). b. Ticking sound will stop upon one of the following: 1) Manual EAS Deactivation Push Button is pressed and released again, 2) EAS timer runs out, or 3) Following a successful EAS tag deactivation. Volume/Tone Push Button The Volume/Tone Push Button also performs multiple functions depending upon the duration of time it is pressed: NOTE Volume changes made using the Volume/Tone Push Button are lost when the scanner is powered-down and are reset to the factory default setting. If you wish to permanently change the volume, use the special programming labels in Chapter 6, Programming. Table A-3. Volume/Tone Push Button Functions PRESS DURATION Momentary (when scanner is asleep) Momentary (when scanner is awake) A-6 FUNCTION COMMENT Wakes scanner from Sleep Mode Alternatively, the scanner can be awakened by: - Moving an object through the scan zone. - A weight change on the scale. - Scanning with an attached auxiliary scanner. Increments volume Press the push button momentarily to increase speaker volume. When the loudest volume is reached, a repeated press of the push button cycles volume back to the lowest setting, then volume increases on subsequent press(es). Five volume levels are available. Magellan® 9500 Controls and Indicators Table A-3. Volume/Tone Push Button Functions (Continued) PRESS DURATION FUNCTION COMMENT Increments tone Press the push button for approximately 2 seconds, then release. Each time this is done, the beeper will sound at one of three tones. Stop when the desired tone (high, medium or low) is sounded. 4 Seconds Scanner Diagnostics Modea This mode allows system support personnel to troubleshoot problems with the scanner. Upon entering Scanner Diagnostic Mode, view the 7-segment display to view Interface Type, Bootloader Version Number, Application Version Number and Configuration File Number. This mode is used to determine if a scanner can read bar codes. Press the button for eight seconds or cycle power to exit Scanner Diagnostics Mode and reset the scanner. 8 Seconds Resets Scannerb Only system support personnel should perform a reset. Hold, then release when the beeper sounds a. By standard default, this function is normally disabled to prevent accidental activation by users. b. Users should not perform scanner resets except under the direction of trained systems support personnel. Product Reference Guide A-7 Manual EAS Deactivation Push Button Using the programming bar codes contained in the Product Reference Guide (PRG) the button can be configured to operate always, or only function when the scanner is enabled. PRESS DURATION Momentarya 3 Seconds upon EAS error FUNCTION COMMENT Manually initiates EAS deactivation Place the item with the EAS tag downstreamb of the horizontal scan window and push the button. Allows scanner to resume function despite EAS system failure (non-fatal error) EAS Failure Mode is indicatedc by: - EAS LED blinks ON/OFF red, scanning disabled. - FRU Status LED Indicator blinks ‘9’ - Error tone is sounded for one second Upon pressing the button for 3 seconds, the scanner will sound 3 high-pitched beeps, then resume scan function. The EAS LED and FRU Status LED will continue blinking as above, but at a slower rate until EAS system function is restored. a. For use in Coupled Mode only b. “Downstream” in this case is defined as being the downstream side of the scan window from the direction of product flow, or scanning direction. c. If the EAS failure corrects itself, blinking will stop and the EAS LED will turn green. A-8 Magellan® 9500 Controls and Indicators Scale Zero Push Button The Scale Zero Push Button is used for multiple functions as listed in Table A-4. The Scale Zero Push Button has no function in a “scanner only” model. NOTE Table A-4. Scale Zero Push Button Functions PRESS DURATION FUNCTION COMMENT Momentary Zero Scale When programmed to do so, the yellow LED should be lit when no weight is on the scale, indicating scale at zero. If it is not, press the switch to zero the scale. The unit will sound a “click” upon pressing the button. 4 Seconds Scale Diagnostics Modea This mode allows system support personnel to troubleshoot problems with the scale. Momentarily press the Scale Zero Push Button or cycle power to exit Scale Diagnostics Mode. 8 Seconds Resets Scanner Only system support personnel a. Diagnostics Mode is meant for use by trained systems support personnel. Users should not need to initiate this function under normal circumstances. Product Reference Guide A-9 Calibration Switch This switch initiates the scale’s calibration routine. A certified weight set is needed to perform the scale calibration steps detailed in Chapter 5, Calibration. This switch is not included in scanners without scale modules. Calibration Switch Seal This seal allows you to secure the Calibration Switch access cover and restrict access to the Calibration Switch. If the calibration seal is broken or missing, you may be prohibited from operating the scale without recertification. Check local and state requirements for specific restrictions. Calibration Switch Cover This cover restricts access to the Calibration Switch to help guard against unauthorized tampering when sealed. See Figure A-1. LEGAL NOTE LEGAL NOTE There are regulations that must be followed in order to ensure compliance when operating a weighing device such as the scanner/scale. Failure to observe and comply with these regulations could result in legal action. Figure A-1. Calibration Switch Cover Calibration Cover Calibration Switch A-10 Magellan® 9500 Appendix B Cable Information Introduction The following pages contain pinout information, enabling you to create standard interface cables for use in interconnecting the scanner, scale, external handheld scanner, and POS terminal. General Specifications Wire Requirements • Cable length should not exceed 15 feet. • Wire gauge = Standard for RJ-45 connectors (28-26 AWG). • If run exceeds 15 feet, we recommend 26 AWG wire size. Product Reference Guide B-1 RS-232 Cable Pinout Scanner Connector Hardware RJ45, 10 Position Cable Pinout Table B-1RS-232 Cable Pinouts B-2 PIN # FUNCTION DESCRIPTION 1 N/C 2 CTS in 3 N/C 4 RTS out Request To Send (output) 5 RxD in Receive Data (Input) 6 TxD out Transmit Data (output) 7 N/C 8 +5V out 9 GND Signal Ground 10 N/C No Connection No Connection Clear To Send (input) No Connection No Connection +5V out Magellan® 9500 RS-232 Cable Pinout — continued RS-232 Cable Pinout — continued Scale Connector Hardware RJ45, 10 Position Cable Pinout Table B-2RS-232 Scale Cable Pinouts PIN # FUNCTION 1 +5V pullup 2 CTS IN 3 N/C 4 RTS OUT 5 RxD IN Receive Data (Input) 6 TxD OUT Transmit Data (output) 7 N/C 8 +5V out 9 Gnd Signal Ground 10 N/C No Connection Product Reference Guide DESCRIPTION +5V pullup Clear To Send (input) No Connection Request To Send (output) No Connection +5V out B-3 IBM Cable Pinout Scanner and Scale Connector Hardware RJ45, 10 Position Cable Pinout Table B-3IBM Cable Pinouts B-4 PIN # FUNCTION DESCRIPTION 1 N/C No Connection 2 N/C No Connection 3 N/C No Connection 4 LINEB 5 N/C 6 LINEA 7 N/C 8 +5V out 9 GND Signal Ground 10 N/C No Connection Line B No Connection Line A No Connection +5V out Magellan® 9500 IBM USB Cable Pinout IBM USB Cable Pinout Scanner and Scale Connector Hardware RJ45, 10 Position Cable Pinout Table B-4IBM USB Cable Pinouts PIN # FUNCTION 1 N/C No Connection 2 N/C No Connection 3 N/C No Connection 4 USB D- 5 N/C 6 USB D+ 7 N/C 8 +5V out 9 GND Signal Ground 10 N/C No Connection Product Reference Guide DESCRIPTION USB DNo Connection USB D+ No Connection +5V out B-5 Auxilliary Port External Handheld Input Connector Hardware RJ45, 10 Position Cable Pinout Table B-5Auxilliary Port Cable Pinouts B-6 PIN # FUNCTION DESCRIPTION 1 +5V pullup 2 CTS in 3 N/C No Connection - Reserved 4 RTS out Request To Send (output) 5 RxD in Receive Data (Input) 6 TxD out Transmit Data (output) 7 N/C 8 +5V out (500mA max) 9 GND Signal Ground 10 N/C No Connection +5V pullup Clear To Send (input) No Connection +5V out Magellan® 9500 Power Cable Power Cable Connector Hardware 6 pin Molex Cable Pinout Table B-6Power Cable Pinouts PIN # FUNCTION 1 EARTH GND Earth Ground 2 SIGNAL GND Signal Ground 3 +5V IN 4 N/C No Connection 5 N/C No Connection 6 +12V IN Product Reference Guide DESCRIPTION +5V in +12V in B-7 Remote Display Connector Hardware 4 pin SDL Cable Pinout Table B-7Remote Display Cable Pinouts B-8 PIN # FUNCTION DESCRIPTION 1 +12V OUT 2 LINE_A_DSPLY LINE A Display 3 LINE_B_DSPLY LINE B Display 4 GND +12V out Ground Magellan® 9500 EAS Comm Port EAS Comm Port EAS Deactivator Control Box Connection Connector Hardware RJ10 Cable Pinout Table B-8EAS Comm Port Cable Pinouts PIN # FUNCTION 1 VCC5 2 EAS DEACT EN~ 3 VCC5 4 EAS DETECT EN~ EAS Detection 5 EAS LBL DETECT EN~ EAS tag Detect 6 GND Signal Ground 7 N/C No Connection 8 EAS TXD EAS Transmit Data 9 EAS RXD EAS Receive Data 10 GND Product Reference Guide DESCRIPTION VCC5 EAS Deactivation VCC5 Signal Ground B-9 NOTES B-10 Magellan® 9500 Appendix C Keypad Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits/characters from a keypad. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 0 1 Product Reference Guide C-1 Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits/characters from a keypad. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 2 3 C-2 Magellan® 9500 Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits/characters from a keypad. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 4 5 Product Reference Guide C-3 Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits/characters from a keypad. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 6 7 C-4 Magellan® 9500 Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits/characters from a keypad. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. 8 9 Product Reference Guide C-5 Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits/characters from a keypad. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. A B C-6 Magellan® 9500 Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits/characters from a keypad. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. C D Product Reference Guide C-7 Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits/characters from a keypad. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. E F C-8 Magellan® 9500 Appendix D Host Commands Accepting Commands from an RS-232 Scanner Host The scanner responds to the following RS-232 commands: COMMAND ASCII HEX COMMENT Enable Scanner E 0x45 Disable Scanner D 0x44 Reset Scanner R 0x52 Not On File Indication F 0x46 Long series of beeps Beep Good Read Tone B 0x42 Beeps if Good Read Beep is enabled Force Good Read Tone 0x01 Beeps regardless of beep setting Bel 0x07 Force Good Read Tone Identification request i 0x69 Returns long responsea Health request h 0x68 Returns long responsea Status request s 0x73 Returns long responsea a. Call Tech Support for information. If one of the above commands is received, the scanner will perform the steps indicated for the command. Host commands for other interfaces is also available. Contact Tech Support for more details. Product Reference Guide D-1 NOTES D-2 Magellan® 9500 Appendix E Factory Defaults The following table provides a listing of the most common factory settings for the interfaces shown. Table E-1Factory Default Settings Aux RS-232 WincorNixdorf Single Cable IBM 17 IBM USB 60 (600ms) 60 (600ms) 60 (600ms) 60 (600ms) 60 (600ms) 60 (600ms) Laser Timeout 20 (5 min.) 20 (5 min.) 20 (5 min.) 20 (5 min.) 20 (5 min.) 20 (5 min.) Motor Timeout 40 (10 min.) 40 (10 min.) 40 (10 min.) 40 (10 min.) 40 (10 min.) 40 (10 min.) Green LED Idle State 2 (on dim) 2 (on dim) 2 (on dim) 2 (on dim) 2 (on dim) 2 (on dim) Scanner Button Options 1 (vol/tone/ reset) 1 (vol/tone/ reset) 1 (vol/tone/ reset) 1 (vol/tone/ reset) 1 (vol/tone/ reset) 1 (vol/tone/ reset) 1 beep 1 beep 1 beep 1 beep 1 beep 1 beep Good Read Beep Control 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) Good Read Beep Frequency 1 (medium) 1 (medium) 1 (medium) 1 (medium) 1 (medium) 1 (medium) Good Read Beep Length 8 (80ms) 8 (80ms) 8 (80ms) 8 (80ms) 8 (80ms) 8 (80ms) Good Read Beep Volume 3 (medhigh) 3 (medhigh) 3 (medhigh) 3 (medhigh) 3 (medhigh) 3 (medhigh) Double Read Timeout Power-up Beep Control Product Reference Guide E-1 Aux RS-232 WincorNixdorf Single Cable IBM 17 IBM USB 1 (after transmit) 1 (after transmit) 1 (after transmit) 1 (after transmit) 1 (after transmit) 1 (after transmit) 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) Scale Country Mode 0 (US) 0 (US) 0 (US) 0 (US) 0 (US) 0 (US) Scale Enforced Zero Return 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) Scale Interface Type 4 (RS-232 SASI) 4 (RS-232 SASI) 4 (RS-232 SASI) 7 (RS-232 single cable) 1 (IBM Port 17) 3 (IBM USB) Scale Motion Level Filter 0 (low) 0 (low) 0 (low) 0 (low) 0 (low) 0 (low) Scale LED Enable 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) Remote Display — Enable/Disable 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) Aux Port Mode 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (single OK) 0 (single OK) 0 (single OK) 0 (single OK) 0 (single OK) 0 (single OK) Productivity Index Reporting (PIR)/ Cashier Training (CT) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) EAS Mode 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) EAS Beep Duration 8 (80ms) 8 (80ms) 8 (80ms) 8 (80ms) 8 (80ms) 8 (80ms) EAS Retry Count 8 (80ms) 8 (80ms) 8 (80ms) 8 (80ms) 8 (80ms) 8 (80ms) EAS Retry Count 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 (enable only when scanner enabled) 2 (enable only when scanner enabled) 2 (enable only when scanner enabled) 2 (enable only when scanner enabled) 2 (enable only when scanner enabled) 2 (enable only when scanner enabled) Good Read When to Indicate Scale Enable Laser Failure Mode Manual EAS Deactivation Push Button E-2 Magellan® 9500 Aux RS-232 WincorNixdorf Single Cable IBM 17 IBM USB EAS Deactivation Duration — Coupled 50 (500ms) 50 (500ms) 50 (500ms) 50 (500ms) 50 (500ms) 50 (500ms) EAS Deactivation Duration — Retry 50 (500ms) 50 (500ms) 50 (500ms) 50 (500ms) 50 (500ms) 50 (500ms) EAS Deactivation Duration — Manual 100 (5sec) 100 (5sec) 100 (5sec) 100 (5sec) 100 (5sec) 100 (5sec) Maximum HostTransmitted Message Length 0 (no limit) 0 (no limit) 0 (no limit) 0 (no limit) 0 (no limit) 0 (no limit) Number of Host Transmission Buffers 1 (2 buffers) 1 (2 buffers) 1 (2 buffers) 1 (2 buffers) 0 (1 buffer) 0 (1 buffer) Global Prefix 00 ("") 00 ("") 00 ("") 00 ("") Global Suffix 0D00 () 0D00 ( ) 0D00 ( ) 0D00 ( ) Full Host Interface Support IBM Interface Options IBM Scale Address 6E IBM Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format 0 (disable) Support MSL Host I/F IBM USB Interface Options 0 (table top scanner) IBM USB Scanner Device Type RS-232 Baud Rate 1 (9600) 1 (9600) 1 (9600) 1 (9600) RS-232 Number of Data Bits 1 (8 data bits) 1 (8 data bits) 1 (8 data bits) 0 (7 data bits) Product Reference Guide E-3 Aux RS-232 WincorNixdorf Single Cable RS-232 Number of Stop Bits 0 (1 stop bit) 0 (1 stop bit) 0 (1 stop bit) 0 (1 stop bit) RS-232 Parity 0 (none) 0 (none) 2 (odd) 2 (odd) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable CTS flow) 0 (none) 0 (none) 0 (none) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) RS-232 Hardware Control RS-232 Intercharacter Delay RS-232 Software Flow Control RS-232 Host Echo RS-232 Host Echo Quiet Interval 1 (10ms) 1 (10ms) RS-232 Ignore Host Commands 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (normal RS-232) 0 (normal RS-232) RS-232 TTL IBM USB 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) RS-232 TTL Invert 0 (disable) 0 (disable) RS-232 Beep on ASCII BEL 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) RS-232 Beep After Weigh 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable) RS-232 Beep on Not on File 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) RS-232 ACK NAK Enable 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) RS-232 ACK Character 6 (ACK) 6 (ACK) 6 (ACK) RS-232 NAK Character 21 (NAK) 21 (NAK) 21 (NAK) E-4 IBM 17 Magellan® 9500 Aux RS-232 WincorNixdorf RS-232 Retry on ACK NAK Timeout 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) RS-232 ACK NAK Timeout Value 1 (200ms) 1 (200ms) 1 (200ms) RS-232 ACK NAK Retry Count 3 resets 3 resets 3 resets RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling 0 (ignore errors) 0 (ignore errors) 0 (ignore errors) RS-232 Label ID Control 1 (enable as prefix) 1 (enable as prefix) 1 (enable as prefix) Single Cable RS-232 Scanner Only Protocol IBM 17 IBM USB 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable as prefix) 0 (scanner-scale) Single Cable RS-232 RTS CTS Selection Option 5 Single Cable RS-232 Use BCC 0 (disable) Single Cable RS-232 Use ACK/NAK 0 (disable) Single Cable RS-232 Use STX 1 (enable) Set Single Cable RS232 STX Character 83 (S) Single Cable RS-232 Use ETX 1 (enable) Set Single Cable RS232 ETX Character UPC-A Enable Single Cable 13 (CR) 1 (enable) Product Reference Guide 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) E-5 Aux RS-232 WincorNixdorf Single Cable IBM 17 IBM USB UPC-A Number System Character Transmission 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) UPC-A Check Character Transmission 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) Expand UPC-A to EAN-13 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) UPC/EAN AIM ID 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) UPC-A Label ID 4100("A") 4100("A") 4100("A") 4100("A") UPC-A 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID 4100("A") 4100("A") 4100("A") 4100("A") UPC-A 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID 4100("A") 4100("A") 4100("A") 4100("A") UPC-A 128 Supplemental Label ID 4100("A") 4100("A") 4100("A") 4100("A") UPC-E Enable 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) UPC-E Number System Character Transmission 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) UPC-E Check Character Transmission 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) Expand UPC-E to UPC-A 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) Expand UPC-E to EAN-13 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) UPC-E Label ID 4500("E") 4500("E") 4300("C") 4500("E") UPC-E 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID 4500("E") 4500("E") 4300("C") 4500("E") UPC-E 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID 4500("E") 4500("E") 4300("C") 4500("E") E-6 Magellan® 9500 Aux RS-232 WincorNixdorf Single Cable UPC-E 128 Supplemental Label ID 4500("E") 4500("E") 4300("C") 4500("E") EAN-13 Enable 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) EAN-13 First Character Transmission 1 (enable) 1 (enable) EAN-13 Check Character Transmission 1 (enable) EAN-13 ISBN Conversion Enable IBM 17 IBM USB 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) EAN 13 Label ID 4600("F") 4600("F") 4100("A") 4600("F") EAN-13 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID 4600("F") 4600("F") 4100("A") 4600("F") EAN-13 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID 4600("F") 4600("F") 4100("A") 4600("F") EAN-13 128 Supplemental Label ID 4600("F") 4600("F") 4100("A") 4600("F") Bookland AIM ID 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) Bookland Label ID 4900 ("I") 4900 ("I") 4100 ("A") 4900 ("I") EAN-8 Enable 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) EAN-8 Check Character Transmission 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) Expand EAN-8 to EAN-13 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) EAN 8 Label ID 4646 ("FF") 4646 ("FF") 4200 ("B") 4646 ("FF") EAN-8 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID 4646 ("FF") 4646 ("FF") 4200 ("B") 4646 ("FF") EAN-8 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID 4646 ("FF") 4646 ("FF") 4200 ("B") 4646 ("FF") Product Reference Guide E-7 Aux RS-232 WincorNixdorf Single Cable 4646 ("FF") 4646 ("FF") 4200 ("B") 4646 ("FF") EAN-8 Decoding Levels 2 (Slightly More Aggresive) 2 (Slightly More Aggresive) 2 (Slightly More Aggresive) UPC/EAN Reconstruction 0 (disable) 0 (disable) Price Weight Check 0 (disable) Enable EAN Two Label IBM 17 IBM USB 2 (Slightly More Aggresive) 2 (Slightly More Aggresive) 2 (Slightly More Aggresive) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) Addons Disable All Disable All Disable All Disable All Disable All Disable All UPC-A and EAN-13 Decoding Levels 2 (Slightly More Aggresive) 2 (Slightly More Aggresive) 2 (Slightly More Aggresive) 2 (Slightly More Aggresive) 2 (Slightly More Aggresive) 2 (Slightly More Aggresive) GTIN Label ID 4700 (“G”) 4700 (“G”) 4700 (“G”) 4700 (“G”) GTIN 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID 4700 (“G”) 4700 (“G”) 4700 (“G”) 4700 (“G”) GTIN 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID 4700 (“G”) 4700 (“G”) 4700 (“G”) 4700 (“G”) GTIN Code 128 Supplemental Label ID 4700 (“G”) 4700 (“G”) 4700 (“G”) 4700 (“G”) RSS-14 Enable 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) RSS-14 Check Character Transmission 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) RSS-14/EAN-128 Emulation 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) RSS-14 2D Component Enable 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) RSS-14 AIM ID 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) EAN-8 128 Supplemental Label ID E-8 Magellan® 9500 Aux RS-232 WincorNixdorf Single Cable 5234 ("R4") 5234 ("R4") 4500 ("E") 5234 ("R4") RSS Expanded Enable 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) RSS Expanded EAN128 Emulation 0 (disable) 0 (disable) RSS Expanded 2D Component Enable 0 (disable) RSS Expanded AIM ID RSS Expanded Label ID IBM 17 IBM USB 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 5258 ("RX") 5258 ("RX") 4500 ("E") 5258 ("RX") 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 0 (variable) RSS Expanded Maximum Label Length 74 74 74 74 74 74 RSS Expanded Minimum Label Length 1 1 1 1 1 1 RSS Expanded Fixed Length 1 8 8 8 8 8 8 RSS Expanded Fixed Length 2 14 14 14 14 14 14 Code 39 Enable 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) Code 39 Start Stop Character Transmission 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) Code 39 Check Character Calculation 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) Code 39 Check Character Transmission 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) RSS-14 Label ID RSS Expanded Length Control Product Reference Guide E-9 Aux RS-232 WincorNixdorf Single Cable IBM 17 IBM USB Code 39 Full ASCII 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) Code 39 AIM ID 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) Code 39 Label ID 2A00 ("*") 2A00 ("*") 4D00 ("M") 4231 ("B1") Code 39 Length Control 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 0 (variable) Code 39 Maximum Label Length 50 50 50 50 50 50 Code 39 Minimum Label Length 2 2 2 2 2 2 Code 39 Fixed Length 1 8 8 8 8 8 8 Code 39 Fixed Length 2 14 14 14 14 14 14 Code 39 Stitching 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) Pharmacode 39 Enable 1 (enable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) Pharmacode 39 Start Stop Character Transmission 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) Pharmacode 39 Check Character Transmission 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) Pharmacode 39 Label ID 4100("A") 4100("A") 4100("A") 4100("A") Code 128 Enable 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) Code 128 Transmit Function Characters 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) Convert Code 128 to Code 39 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) E-10 Magellan® 9500 Aux RS-232 WincorNixdorf Single Cable Code 128 AIM ID 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) Code 128 Label ID 2300 ("#") 2300 ("#") 4B00 ("K") 4233 ("B3") Code 128 Length Control 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 0 (variable) Code 128 Maximum Label Length 80 80 Code 128 Minimum Label Length 2 Code 128 Fixed Length 1 Code 128 Fixed Length 2 IBM 17 IBM USB 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 80 80 80 80 2 2 2 2 2 8 8 8 8 8 8 14 14 14 14 14 14 Code 128 Stitching 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) EAN-128 Enable 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) EAN-128 AIM ID 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable) EAN-128 Label ID 0000 ("") 0000 ("") 5000 ("P") 0000 ("") Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) Enable 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) I 2 of 5 AIM ID 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) I 2 of 5 Label ID 6900 ("i") 6900 ("i") 4900 ("I") 4232 ("B2") I 2 of 5 Length Control 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 0 (variable) Product Reference Guide E-11 Aux RS-232 WincorNixdorf Single Cable IBM 17 IBM USB I 2 of 5 Maximum Label Length 50 50 50 50 50 50 I 2 of 5 Minimum Label Length 6 6 6 6 6 6 I 2 of 5 Fixed Length 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 I 2 of 5 Fixed Length 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 I 2 of 5 Stitching 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) Codabar Enable 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) Codabar Start Stop Character Transmission 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) Codabar Start Stop Character Set 3 (abcd/ abcd) 3 (abcd/ abcd) 3 (abcd/ abcd) 3 (abcd/ abcd) 3 (abcd/ abcd) 3 (abcd/ abcd) Codabar Start Stop Character Match 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) Codabar Check Character Calculation 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) Codabar Check Character Transmission 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) Codabar AIM ID 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) Codabar Label ID 2500 ("%") 2500 ("%") 4E00 ("N") 2500 ("%") Codabar Length Control 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 0 (variable) Codabar Maximum Label Length 50 50 50 50 50 50 Codabar Minimum Label Length 8 8 8 8 8 8 E-12 Magellan® 9500 Aux RS-232 WincorNixdorf Single Cable IBM 17 IBM USB Codabar Fixed Length 1 8 8 8 8 8 8 Codabar Fixed Length 2 14 14 14 14 14 14 Codabar Stitching 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) Code 93 Enable 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) Code 93 AIM ID 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) Code 93 Label ID 2600 ("&") 2600 ("&") 4C00 ("L") 2600 ("&") Code 93 Length Control 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 0 (variable) Code 93 Maximum Label Length 50 50 50 50 50 50 Code 93 Minimum Label Length 2 2 2 2 2 2 Code 93 Fixed Length 1 8 8 8 8 8 8 Code 93 Fixed Length 2 14 14 14 14 14 14 Code 93 Stitching 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) MSI/Plessey Enable 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) MSI/Plessey Check Character Calculation 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) MSI/Plessey Number of Check Characters 0 (1 check char) 0 (1 check char) 0 (1 check char) 0 (1 check char) MSI/Plessey Check Character Transmission 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) MSI/Plessey AIM ID 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) Product Reference Guide E-13 Aux RS-232 WincorNixdorf Single Cable 4000 ("@") 4000 ("@") 4F00 ("O") 4000 ("@") MSI/Plessey Length Control 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 0 (variable) MSI/Plessey Maximum Label Length 16 16 16 16 MSI/Plessey Minimum Label Length 4 4 4 4 MSI/Plessey Fixed Length 1 7 7 7 7 MSI/Plessey Fixed Length 2 8 8 8 8 MSI/Plessey Stitching 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) Standard 2 of 5 Enable 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation 0 (disable) 0 (disable) Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission 1 (enable) Standard 2 of 5 AIM ID IBM 17 IBM USB 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) Standard 2 of 5 Label ID 5300 ("S") 5300 ("S") 5300 ("S") 5300 ("S") 5300 ("S") 5300 ("S") Standard 2 of 5 Length Control 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 0 (variable) 50 50 50 50 50 50 MSI/Plessey Label ID Standard 2 of 5 Maximum Label Length E-14 Magellan® 9500 Aux RS-232 WincorNixdorf Single Cable IBM 17 IBM USB Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Label Length 6 6 6 6 6 6 Standard 2 of 5 Fixed Length 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 Standard 2 of 5 Fixed Length 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) Standard 2 of 5 Stitching Product Reference Guide E-15 NOTES E-16 Magellan® 9500 Appendix F Handheld Data Format Requirements This appendix provides application notes to describe the general format of data that can be accepted by the scanner through the auxilliary port as transmitted from a handheld scanner. Handheld Data Format Requirements General • 9600 bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity. • RTS is used to "bracket" the data received from the handheld: RTS must be asserted high during data transmission, and de-asserted after label transmission is complete. No other flow control mechanisms are required or supported. • Symbologies requiring fixed lengths (UPC/EAN) will enforce length requirements for validation of the label. • Handheld will be required to transmit start and stop characters for Codabar and Code 39 labels. • Appropriate industrial length requirements will be enforced (if configured) for validation of the label. • Maximum label lengths will be enforced for label validation (i.e. labels longer than the maximum label size will not be validated). • Standard Datalogic formats generally use a single prefix character. The specific formats are provided below. Product Reference Guide F-1 Datalogic Handheld Data Format Requirements The following sections describe label transmission formats that are typically observed in factory configurations of Datalogic handheld scanners. RSS-14 • Prefix must be ASCII characters ‘R4’ • Check character must be included in label • Application identifier “01” must follow the prefix and preceed the base label • Label length excluding prefix characters must be 16 characters. • Example: ‘R40101044123456789’ RSS Expanded • Prefix must be ASCII characters ‘R4’ • Check character must be included in label UPC-A • Number system must be included in label data. • Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct. • Prefix must be an ASCII character 'A' - total length including prefix must be 13. • Example: 'A060992011187'. UPC-A with 2-Digit Supplemental F-2 • Number system must be included in label data. • Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct. • Supplemental data is appended to base label. • Prefix must be an ASCII character 'A' - total length including prefix must be 15. • Example: 'A06099201118712'. Magellan® 9500 UPC-A with 5-Digit Supplemental • Number system must be included in label data • Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct • Prefix must be an ASCII character 'A' - total length including prefix must be 18 • Example: 'A06099201118712345' UPC-A with Code 128 Supplemental • Number system must be included in label data. • Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct. • Supplemental data is appended to base label. • Prefix must be an ASCII character 'A' - total length including prefix must be greater or equal to 19 Code 128 Supplemental codes are variable length having a minimum of 2 data characters). • Characters immediately following base label must be of the form '8100', '8101' or '8102'. • Example: 'A0609920111878100000951'. UPC-E • Number system must be included in label data • Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct • Prefix must be an ASCII character 'E' - total length including prefix must be 9 • Example: 'E09988750' Product Reference Guide F-3 UPC-E with 2-Digit Supplemental • Number system must be included in label data. • Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct. • Supplemental data is appended to base label. • Prefix must be an ASCII character 'E' - total length including prefix must be 11. • Example: 'E0998875012'. UPC-E with 5-Digit Supplemental • Number system must be included in label data. • Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct. • Prefix must be an ASCII character 'E' - total length including prefix must be 14. • Example: 'E0998875012345'. UPC-E with Code 128 Supplemental F-4 • Number system must be included in label data. • Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct. • Supplemental data is appended to base label. • Prefix must be an ASCII character 'E' - total length including prefix must be greater or equal to 15 (code 128 Supplemental codes are variable length having a minimum of 2 data characters). • Characters immediately following base label must be of the form '8100', '8101' or '8102'. • Example: 'E099887508101000951'. Magellan® 9500 EAN-8 • Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct • Prefix must be an ASCII characters 'FF' - total length including prefix must be 10 • Example: 'FF00210126' EAN-8 with 2-Digit Supplemental • Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct. • Supplemental data is appended to base label. • Prefix must be an ASCII characters 'FF' - total length including prefix must be 12. • Example: 'FF0021012612'. EAN-8 with 5-Digit Supplemental • Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct. • Prefix must be an ASCII characters 'FF' - total length including prefix must be 15. • Example: 'FF0021012612345'. EAN-8 with Code 128 Supplemental • Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct. • Supplemental data is appended to base label. • Prefix must be an ASCII characters 'FF' - total length including prefix must be greater than 16 (code 128 Supplemental codes are variable length having a minimum of 2 data characters). • Characters immediately following base label must be of the form '8100', '8101' or '8102'. • Example: 'FF002101268102000951'. Product Reference Guide F-5 EAN-13 • Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct • Prefix must be an ASCII character 'F'- total length including prefix must be 14 • Example: 'F1101234567891' EAN-13 with 2-Digit Supplemental • Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct • Supplemental data is appended to base label • Prefix must be an ASCII character 'F'- total length including prefix must be 16 • Example: 'F110123456789112' EAN-13 with 5-Digit Supplemental • Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct. • Prefix must be an ASCII character 'F'- total length including prefix must be 19. • Example: 'F110123456789112345'. EAN-13 with Code 128 Supplemental F-6 • Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct • Supplemental data is appended to base label • Prefix must be an ASCII character 'F'- total length including prefix must be greater or equal to 20 (code 128 Supplemental codes are variable length having a minimum of 2 data characters) • Characters immediately following base label must be of the form '8100', '8101' or '8102' • Example: 'F11012345678918100000951' Magellan® 9500 Code 39 • Check character must be included in label data. • Label length including start, stop and check characters and excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type. • Start and stop characters "*" must be included in label. • Prefix must be an ASCII character '*'. • Example : '**Code 39.TEST*'. Code 39-Pharmacode • Check character must be included in label data. • Label length including start, stop and check characters and excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type. • Start and stop characters "*" must be included in label. • Prefix must be an ASCII character 'p'. • Example: 'p*123456789*'. I 2 of 5 • Check character must be included in label data. • Label length including check characters and excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type. • Prefix must be an ASCII character 'i'. • Example: 'i0123456789'. Product Reference Guide F-7 Codabar • Check character must be included in label data. • Label length including check character and excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type. • Prefix must be an ASCII character '%'. • Start stop character sets must meet the matching requirement set forth by the scanner configuration item Codabar Start Stop Character Match. • Start stop character sets must be of the form ABCD/ABCD and must be included in the label. • Example: '%s$99.95s' (the lower case ‘s’ at each end of the example is a placeholder for the start stop character set). Code 128 F-8 • Prefix must be an ASCII character '#'. • Label length excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type. • Function characters may be transmitted as a hexadecimal value 8x. Where x correlates to function characters 1 thru 4 as follows: • x80 = function code 1 • x81 = function code 2 • x82 = function code 3 • x83 = function code 4 • For Code 128 programming labels the format is of the general form '#/82nnnnn/r ' - /82 is hexadecimal 82 and /r is carriage return. • Example: '#Code_128.Test'. Magellan® 9500 MSI/Plessey • Check character must be included in label data. • Label length including check character and excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type. • Prefix must be an ASCII character '@'. • Example: '@144769254'. Code 93 • Prefix must be an ASCII character '&'. • Label length excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type. • Example: '&Code93-test'. PDF417 • Prefix must be an ASCII character 'P'. • Label length excluding prefix character cannot exceed 300 characters. In addition to this, label length excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner’s fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type. Product Reference Guide F-9 AIM Formats AIM specifies a 3-character string that is attached as a prefix to the label data for transmission. Because AIM specifies one identifier for UPC-A, UPC-E and EAN-13 labels, UPC-A, UPC-E and EAN-13 will be received from the handheld and transmitted by the scanner as EAN-13. The ']' character must be the first character received in the label transmission from the handheld. The following sections describe the prefix strings and identify what specific label characteristics can be supported. UPC-A • AIM does not specify UPC-A as a separate symbology using this transmission format - labels will be transmitted as EAN-13. • Example: ']E00060992011187'. UPC-E • AIM does not specify UPC-E as a separate symbology using this transmission format - labels will be transmitted as EAN-13. • Example: ']E00000000998875'. EAN-13 • Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct. • Prefix must be ASCII characters ']E0'- total length including prefix must be 16. • Example: ']E01101234567891'. EAN-8 F-10 • Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct. • Prefix must be ASCII characters ']E4' - total length including prefix must be 11. • Example: ']E400210126'. Magellan® 9500 2-Digit Supplemental • Supplemental data is appended to any EAN base label. • Prefix must be ASCII characters ']E1'. • length of Supplemental data including prefix must be 5. Total required length is 21 for EAN-13 and 16 for EAN-8. • Examples: addon portion is highlighted data is underlined. UPC-A 2-Digit addon ']E00060992011187]E112' UPC-E 2-Digit addon ']E00000000998875]E112' EAN-8 2-Digit addon ']E400210126]E112' EAN-13 2-Digit addon ']E01101234567891]E112' 5-Digit Supplemental • Supplemental data is appended to any EAN base label. • Prefix must be ASCII characters ']E2'. • Length of supplemental data including prefix must be 8. Total required length is 24 for EAN-13 and 19 for EAN-8. • Examples: addon portion is highlighted data is underlined. UPC-A 5-Digit addon ']E00060992011187]E212345' UPC-E 5-Digit addon ']E00000000998875]E212345' EAN-8 5-Digit addon ']E400210126]E212345' EAN-13 5-Digit addon ']E01101234567891]E212345' Product Reference Guide F-11 Code 128 Supplemental • Supplemental data is appended to any EAN base label. • Prefix must be ASCII characters ']C0'. • length of Supplemental data including prefix is variable but must be at least 9. • Examples: addon portion is highlighted data is underlined. UPC-A Code 128 addon ']E00060992011187]C08100000951' UPC-E Code 128 addon 'E00000000998875]C08100000951' EAN-8 Code 128 addon ']E400210126]C08100000951' EAN-13 Code 128 addon ']E01101234567891]C08100000951' Bookland • The 'Bookland' / ISBN code will be formatted as a vendor specific AIM label. • Prefix must be ASCII characters ']X0'. • length of label data including prefix is 13. • Examples: ']X01234567890'. Code 39 F-12 • Check character must be included in label data. • Label length including start, stop and check characters and excluding prefix characters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type. • Start and stop characters "*" must be included in label. • Prefix must be ASCII characters ']A0' or ']A1'. • Example: '*]A0Code 39.TEST*'. Magellan® 9500 Codabar • Check character must be included in label data. • Label length including check character and excluding prefix characters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type. • Prefix must be ASCII characters ']F0'. • Start stop character sets must meet the matching requirement set forth by the scanner configuration item Codabar Start Stop Character Match. • Start stop character sets s must be of the form ABCD/ABCD and must be included in the label. • Example: ']F0s$99.95s' (the lower case ‘s’ at each end of the example is a placeholder for the start stop character set). MSI/Plessey • Check character must be included in label data. • Label length including check character and excluding prefix characters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type. • Prefix must be ASCII characters ']M0'. • Example: ']M0144769254'. Code 93 • Prefix must be ASCII characters ']G0'. • Label length excluding prefix characters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type. • Example : ']G0Code93-test'. Product Reference Guide F-13 RSS-14 • Prefix must be ASCII characters ']e0'. • Check character must be included in label. • Label length excluding prefix characters must be 14 characters. • Example: ']e001044123456789'. RSS Expanded • Prefix must be ASCII characters ']e0'. • Label length excluding prefix characters must be at least 1 character. Maximum length is the maximum label size supported by the scanner. • Example: ']e001900123456789083103001750'. I 2 of 5 F-14 • Check character must be included in label data. • Label length including check characters and excluding prefix characters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type. • Prefix must be an ASCII character ']I1' (other prefixes specify different check character properties which are not supported). • Example: ']I10123456789'. Magellan® 9500 Code 128 / EAN128 • Prefix must be either ASCII characters ']C0', ']C1' or ']C2'. • Label length excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type. • If EAN-128 Symbology is Enabled and prefix is ']C1', label will be identified as an EAN128 otherwise it is identified as a Code 128. • A prefix of ']C0' designates that no function code is present in the 1st or 2nd character position. • A prefix of ']C2' designates that a function code 1 is present in the 2nd character. • Example : ']C0Code_128.Test'. PDF417 • Prefix must be an ASCII characters ']L0'. • Label length excluding prefix character cannot exceed 300 characters. In addition to this, label length excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner’s fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type. • Example : ']L0pdf_test_label'. Product Reference Guide F-15 NOTES F-16 Magellan® 9500 ASCII Character Set The table on this page shows a set of ASCII characters and their corresponding Hex Values. The Hex Values in this table are needed for setting symbology specific label identifiers, as well as enabling custom prefix and suffix characters. Table 1 ASCII Char. Hex No. ASCII Char. Hex No. ASCII Char. Hex No. ASCII Char. Hex No. NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL BS HT LF VT FF CR SO SI DLE DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS RS US 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F SP ! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , . / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ? 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _ 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F ‘ a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ DEL 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F Australia Japan Datalogic Scanning Pty Ltd Telephone: [61] (2) 9870 3200 australia.scanning@datalogic.com Datalogic Scanning KK Telephone: 81 (0)3 3491 6761 japan.scanning@datalogic.com France and Benelux Latin America Datalogic Scanning Sarl Telephone: [33].01.64.86.71.00 france.scanning@datalogic.com Datalogic Scanning, Inc Telephone: (305) 591-3222 latinamerica.scanning@datalogic.com Germany Singapore Datalogic Scanning GmbH Telephone: 49 (0) 61 51/93 58-0 germany.scanning@datalogic.com Datalogic Scanning Singapore PTE LTD Telephone: (65) 6435-1311 singapore.scanning@datalogic.com India Spain and Portugal Datalogic Scanning India Telephone: 91- 22 - 64504739 india.scanning@datalogic.com Datalogic Scanning Sarl Sucursal en España Telephone: 34 91 746 28 60 spain.scanning@datalogic.com Italy Datalogic Scanning SpA Telephone: [39] (0) 39/62903.1 italy.scanning@datalogic.com United Kingdom Datalogic Scanning LTD Telephone: 44 (0) 1923 809500 uk.scanning@datalogic.com www.scanning.datalogic.com Datalogic Scanning, Inc. 959 Terry Street Eugene, OR 97402 USA Telephone: (541) 683-5700 Fax: (541) 345-7140 ©2004-2008 Datalogic Scanning, Inc. R44-2756 (Rev. B) 4/08
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No Page Count : 460 XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39 Creator Tool : FrameMaker 7.2 Modify Date : 2008:04:17 12:28:57Z Title : untitled Producer : Acrobat Distiller 8.1.0 (Windows) Page Mode : UseOutlines Creator : FrameMaker 7.2 Create Date : 2008:04:17 12:26:26EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools